Ando Aq 7260 User Manual

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 461

User’s

Manual AQ7260 OTDR

IM 813920300-01E
3rd Edition
Product Registration
Thank you for purchasing YOKOGAWA products.

YOKOGAWA provides registered users with a variety of information and


services.
Please allow us to serve you best by completing the product registration
form accessible from our homepage.

http://www.yokogawa.com/tm/

PIM 103-01E
PREFACE

Preface
Thank you for purchasing the AQ7260. The AQ7260 is a compact optical time domain
reflectometer with various functions and is designed to measure loss and detect faults in
optical fibers.
This user's manual refers to AQ7260 OTDR which software version is 2.08 or later.
Before using the AQ7260 (hereafter referred to as the instrument), please read this
manual thoroughly. In particular, the “Safety Precautions” given at the beginning of this
manual should be read to gain a full understanding of the instrument.
After reading, please keep this manual in a safe place so that it can be referred to anytime
it is required.

Caution
This user's manual refers to AQ7260 OTDR which software version is 2.08 or later.

Refer
Procedure of checking software version, refer to page 10-5.

Caution If the pulse width is set to 100 ns, the measured waveform may differ from that
when using version 2.07 of the software or earlier. This is due to changes made to
the circuits used in the OTDR for improved performance, and does not indicate an
abnormality with the OTDR hardware.
For more information, see section 10.1, “Checking the software version”.

• Copying or reproduction of all or any part of the contents of this manual without
permission is strictly prohibited.
• The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice.
• Every effort has been made in the preparation of this manual. However, should
you find any errors or lack of descriptions, please contact the agent from whom the
instrument was purchased.
• This instrument falls under the category of goods (or technology) restricted by the
Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Law. Thus, in accordance with this law and
before exporting this instrument permission must be obtained from the government
of Japan.

TIP y The instrument uses Linux and Microwindows. Linux is a trademark or a


registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in U.S.A. and other countries.
y This product includes open source software. For the procedure of obtaining the source
code, contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer.

I
WARRANTY

Warranty

• The warranty period is one year from the date of purchase.


• Should breakdown occur during the warranty period, repairs shall be made free of
charge according to the warranty policy.
• Breakdown arising from operating mistakes or modifications performed by the user
or breakdown/damage caused by natural disasters shall be exempt from this
warranty policy, even if it occurs during the warranty period.
• A certificate of compliance to guarantee the designed quality accompanies
YOKOGAWA products.

Prior to shipment, every YOKOGAWA product undergoes strict inspections that are
carried out according to its quality assurance system. However, should breakdown
occur arising from defects in manufacturing or accidents during transport, please
contact the agent from whom the product was purchased.

TIP y Recommended recalibration period is 1 year. Inquiry of about recalibration,


please contact the agent from whom the instrument was purchased.

y The following parts are consumable parts and are not subject to the warranty
period.

product name Part name Life span *1


Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) panel 3 years
Main Frame Battery pack 1 year
Back up battery 5 years
Optical Module Ferrule on the connector 1 year
Printer Equivalent to 3,000 roll of
Expansion
printer paper.
unit
FDD 3 years

*1: Each life span depends on the environmental conditions and frequency of use.

II
CONVENTIONS USED IN THIS MANUAL

Conventions Used in this Manual


Safety Graphic Marks
The following graphic marks are given in this manual to ensure the safe use of this
instrument and to prevent injury and property damage. Before operating the instrument,
please read the following carefully to gain thorough understanding.

The following graphic marks indicate the degree of danger and damage that may
occur as a result of improper handling.

WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that may possibly result in death or serious injury in the event of
improper handling.

CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that may result in moderate injury or property damage in the
event of improper handling.

The degree of danger and damage is indicated by the following graphic symbols.

“U” indicates a warning or caution.


This example indicates fire warning.

“{” indicates a prohibited operation.


This example indicates that disassembly is prohibited.

“z” indicates an obligatory operation.


This example indicates that the AC adapter must be removed from the power outlet.

III
CONVENTIONS USED IN THIS MANUAL

Other Graphic Marks

Caution This is called a caution mark. It indicates an operation or procedure that requires
special care or a point to be observed regarding handling of the instrument.

TIP
This is called a TIP mark. It indicates information that is useful for operation of the
instrument.

Refer
This is called a reference mark. It indicates the reference page for the contents or
terms used in this manual.

The following symbols are used on this instrument.

Direct current.

Alternating current.

Danger, Caution

Danger, risk of electronic shock.

Equipment protected throughout by DOUBLE INSULATION


or REINFORCED INSULATION

IV
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Safety Precautions
This section must be read to ensure safe use of the instrument. After reading, keep this
manual in a safe place so that it can be referred to anytime it is required.

For Safe Use of Laser Products


This instrument uses a laser light source and as such, falls into the category of “class 1M
laser product” specified by “EN60825-1:1994 +A2:2001 Safety of Laser Products-Part 1:
Equipment Classification, Requirements and User’s Guide”.
And the laser products comply with 21CFR1040.10 except for deviations pursuant to Laser
Notice No.50, dated May 27 2001.

Optical module AQ7261 AQ7264


Laser class 1M 1M
Center wavelength 1310nm, 1550nm 1310nm, 1550nm
Output CW --------------------- ≤1mW@1310nm, 1550nm
power PULSE ≤100mW@1310nm, 1550nm ≤100mW@1310nm, 1550nm
PULSE ≤20μs@1310nm(duty:≤1.6%) ≤20μs@1310nm(duty:≤1.6%)
WIDTH ≤20μs@1550nm(duty:≤1.6%) ≤20μs@1550nm(duty:≤1.6%)
50μs@1550nm(duty:≤0.8%)

Optical module AQ7265


Laser class 1M
Center wavelength 1310nm, 1550nm
Output CW ≤1mW@1310nm, 1550nm
power PULSE ≤100mW@1310nm, 1550nm
PULSE ≤20μs@1310nm(duty:≤1.6%)
WIDTH ≤20μs@1550nm(duty:≤1.6%)
50μs@1550nm(duty:≤0.8%)

Optical module AQ7269


Laser class 1M 1M
Center wavelength 850nm, 1300nm 1310nm, 1550nm
PULSE ≤100mW@850nm, 13000nm ≤100mW@1310nm, 1550nm
Output
PULSE ≤200ns@850nm(duty:≤1.6%) ≤20μs@1310nm(duty:≤1.6%)
power
WIDTH ≤1μs@1300nm(duty:≤1.6%) ≤20μs@1550nm(duty:≤1.6%)

INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION


DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CLASS 1M LASER PRODUCT

V
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

WARNING

Invisible laser beam is output from the emitter section. The emitter section is located on the
top panel.
A message “LASER ON” is displayed while a laser beam is emitted.
Class 1M laser invisible radiation when LASER ON. *1
Viewing the laser output with certain optical instruments (for example, eye loupes,
magnifiers and microscopes) within a distance of 100mm may pose eye hazard.
*1: When measuring or Light source function ON
These laser beams cannot be seen by the human eye. Should the beams enter the eyes,
they may be seriously damaged, resulting in excessive deterioration of eyesight. To
prevent such accidents, the following points must be strictly observed.
• Never emit laser beam if no optical fiber is connected to the emitter section.
• When disconnecting the optical fiber from the emitter section, stop emission first.
• While laser beam is output, never stare into the emitter section nor the end of the
optical fiber that is connected to the emitter section.
Do not disassemble or modify the instrument, since high-power laser beams may be output
when doing so.
If repair is necessary due to breakdown, contact the agent from whom the instrument was
purchased. Repair is allowed by qualified personnel only.

VI
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Notes on Power Supply


The instrument can be powered by the following two methods.

• AC adapter (supplied with the instrument)


• Battery pack (Model name : 3UR18650F-2)

Refer
For details on use of power supply, refer to page 3-3.

Before connecting the instrument to the power, read the safety precautions given below.

AC adapter

CAUTION
Do not connect or disconnect the power cord while the instrument is powered ON.
Doing so may result in breakdown.

Only use the dedicated AC adapter with the instrument.


Using a different AC adapter can result in instrument damage.

VII
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Battery Pack

WARNING
If the battery fluid leaks from the battery pack and enters the eyes, immediately wash with
clean water, such as tap water, (never rub the eyes) and consult a doctor. Failure to do so
may cause damage to the eyes.

If leaking battery fluid enters the mouth, rinse immediately and thoroughly with tap water or
some other type of clean water, then seek medical attention immediately.

The instrument and battery pack must be kept out of the reach of children.

If the battery fluid leaks and adheres to skin or clothes, immediately wash with clean water,
such as tap water. Adhesion to the skin may produce irritation.

VIII
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

CAUTION
Do not disassemble or modify the battery pack. The battery pack has built-in safety and
protective functions designed to prevent danger. If these functions are damaged, the
battery fluid may leak from the battery pack, resulting in heat generation, smoke, explosion
or fire.
Do not connect the “+” and “−” terminals of the battery pack with metal objects like a wire.
In addition, do not carry the battery pack or store it near metal necklaces or hairpins. Doing
so may short-circuit the battery pack. This may cause excessive current flow, resulting in
leakage, heat generation, smoke, explosion or fire, or may cause the metal objects,
necklaces or hairpins to generate heat.
Do not put the battery pack into a fire or heat it. Doing so may melt insulating materials,
damage the protective circuit, or cause the battery fluid to catch fire, resulting in leakage,
heat generation, smoke, explosion or fire.

Do not use or leave the battery pack near a fire or hot objects such as stoves. Doing so
may cause short-circuit in the battery pack, resulting in battery fluid leakage, heat
generation, smoke, explosion or fire.

Do not put the battery pack under any water, including seawater, or let it get wet. If the
built-in protective circuit is damaged, the battery pack will be charged with abnormal current
or voltage. This may cause a chemical reaction inside the battery pack, resulting in battery
fluid leakage, heat generation, smoke, explosion or fire.
Do not charge the battery pack near a fire or under very hot sunshine. If it gets hot, the
protective device will initiate to prevent danger, hindering charging, or it gets damaged
causing charging with abnormal current or voltage. Such charging may cause a chemical
reaction inside the battery pack, resulting in battery fluid leakage, heat generation, smoke,
explosion or fire.
Charging of the battery pack must be performed on this instrument under the specified
charging conditions. If charging is performed in an environment that does not conform to
the specified charging conditions (e.g. at excessively high temperatures, with higher
voltage/current than the specified, using a modified charger), the battery pack may be
excessively charged, or charged with abnormal current. Such charging may cause an
abnormal chemical reaction inside the battery pack, resulting in battery fluid leakage, heat
generation, smoke, explosion or fire.
Do not pierce the battery pack with a nail, hit it with a hammer, or stamp on it. Doing so
may damage or deform the battery pack. This may cause short-circuit inside the battery
pack, resulting in battery fluid leakage, heat generation, smoke, explosion or fire.

Do not cause any excessive impact to the battery pack or throw it. Doing so may result in
battery fluid leakage, heat generation, smoke, explosion or fire.
Furthermore, if the built-in protective circuit is damaged, the battery pack will be charged
with abnormal current or voltage. This may cause an abnormal chemical reaction inside the
battery pack, resulting in battery fluid leakage, heat generation, smoke, explosion or fire.
Do not solder directly on the battery pack. Doing so may melt insulating materials, damage
the protective circuit, resulting in battery fluid leakage, heat generation, smoke, explosion
or fire.

Do not use the battery pack if it shows excessive damage or deformation. Using it in such
condition may result in battery fluid leakage, heat generation, smoke, explosion or fire.

IX
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

CAUTION
The battery pack must only be used for this instrument.

If charging is not complete even if the specified charging time has elapsed, stop charging.
Continuing to charge the battery pack may result in battery fluid leakage, heat generation,
smoke, explosion or fire.

Do not put the battery pack in a microwave oven or high-pressure container. The battery
pack may be heated rapidly or may no longer be airtight, resulting in battery fluid leakage,
heat generation, smoke, explosion or fire.

If battery fluid leakage or an odd smell is detected, immediately take the battery pack away
from the heat source. Leaving it in such condition may cause the battery fluid to catch fire,
resulting in smoke, explosion or fire.

If odd smells, heat generation, discoloration or deformation are noticed during use,
charging or storage of the battery pack, disconnect it from the instrument or charger, and
do not use it. Continuing to use it in such conditions may result in battery fluid leakage,
heat generation, smoke, explosion or fire.
Do not use or leave the battery pack in strong direct sunlight or in places like inside an
automobile under very strong sunshine. Doing so may result in battery fluid leakage, heat
generation or smoke. It also may deteriorate the performance or life of the battery pack.

The battery pack has a built-in protective circuit designed to prevent danger. So, do not use
the battery pack in places where static electricity that is likely to damage the protective
device is generated. Using the battery pack in such places may damage the protective
device, resulting in battery fluid leakage, heat generation, smoke, explosion or fire.
The battery pack can be charged in the following temperature range. Charging the battery
pack outside this range may cause battery fluid leakage, heat generation or breakdown. It
may also deteriorate the performance or life of the battery pack. Allowed charging
temperature range: 5°C to 30°C
If rust, odd smells, heat generation or any other abnormality are found when using the
instrument for the first time following purchase, stop its use and contact the agent from
whom the instrument was purchased.

X
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Notes on Operating Environment and Conditions


Restrictions Regarding Operating Environment

WARNING
Take care not to let water enter the instrument or to allow it to get wet.
Failure to observe this may result in fire, electric shock or breakdown.

Restrictions Regarding Operating Conditions

WARNING
The power cord specified by YOKOGAWA must be used.
Use of any other power cord may result in fire, electric shock or accident.

Never use a power cord nor AC adapter other than the ones specified.
Doing so could result in fire, electric shock, or instrument damage.

XI
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Notes on Installation
For Personnel Performing Installation

WARNING
Do not connect the instrument to an AC outlet using an extension power cord.
Doing so may result in heat generation or fire.

CAUTION
Do not dissemble or modify the instrument.
Doing so may result in electric shock, fire or accident.

Do not expose the instrument to water splashes.


Failure to observe this may result in electric shock, fire or accident.

Do not allow the terminals to short-circuit.


Failure to observe this may result in fire or breakdown.

When using an AC adapter, make sure that it is inserted into the AC outlet properly.
If the power plug comes into contact with metal objects, fire or electric shock may result.

When carrying out work with the instrument on your shoulders, take care not to let it drop.
Failure to observe this may result in injury or breakdown.

XII
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Restricted and Prohibited Items Regarding Operating Environment and


Conditions

WARNING
Do not insert metal bars or such like into gaps on the instrument.
Doing so may result in fire, electric shock or accident.

CAUTION
Keep the power cord away from heaters etc.
Failure to observe this may result in electric shock.

Do not connect or disconnect the power plug with wet hands.


Doing so may result in electric shock.

Do not place the instrument in humid or dusty areas.


Doing so may result in electric shock or breakdown.

Do not place the instrument on an unstable surface like a shaky table or slope.
The instrument may drop or turn over, causing injury.

Do not place the instrument in areas where there is excessive vibration or impact.
The instrument may drop or turn over, causing injury.

When disconnecting the power cord, always hold the plug and pull it out.
Pulling the power cord may damage the cord, resulting in fire or electric shock.

Do not place the instrument in direct sunlight or in places like inside a car under the very
hot sunshine.
Placing the instrument in such places may cause the temperature inside the instrument to
rise, resulting in breakdown.

XIII
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Prohibited Items Regarding Installation Method

WARNING
Do not place heavy objects on the power cord, heat or pull it, and do not modify the power
cord.
Doing so may damage the cord, resulting in fire or electric shock.

CAUTION
Before transferring the instrument to another site, make sure that the power plug is
removed from the AC outlet and all the external connecting cables are disconnected.
Failure to observe this may damage the cord, resulting in fire or electric shock.

Notes on Handling

The instrument must be handled according to the procedures given in this manual.
Warning marks (“WARNING”, “CAUTION”) must be strictly observed.

WARNING
Do not leave metal objects or containers of liquid, such as water, near the instrument.
Strong wind may turn over the container spilling the water or cause metal objects to hit the
instrument, resulting in fire, electric shock or breakdown.

Do not modify the power cord, bend, twist or pull it excessively.


Failure to observe this may result in fire or electric shock.

Before plugging in or removing connectors from the instrument, make sure that the
instrument is powered OFF.
Failure to observe this may result in fire, electric shock or breakdown.

Do not disassemble or modify the instrument.


Doing so may result in fire, electric shock or accident.

Do not allow the terminals of the battery pack to get wet.


Failure to observe this may result in rust, fire or electric shock.

XIV
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

CAUTION
When closing panels and covers, take care not to trap your fingers.

If you are not going to use the instrument for a long period of time, the power plug must be
removed from the AC outlet for safety reasons. It must also be removed in the event of
thunderstorms.
Failure to observe this may result in fire, electric shock or breakdown.
Do not use the instrument at -10°C or lower temperatures.
Operation of the indicators cannot be guaranteed.

Do not allow short-circuiting of the battery pack’s terminals with metal objects.
Failure to observe this may result in fire or breakdown.

Caution If this instrument is used in a manner not specified in this manual, the protection
provided by this instrument may be impaired.

Notes on Maintenance and Inspection

Periodic maintenance and inspection of the instrument are recommended. For enquiries
regarding maintenance and inspection, contact the agent from whom the instrument was
purchased.

CAUTION
Take care not to let dust or dirt collect inside the instrument.
Collection of dust or dirt inside the instrument may result in fire or breakdown.

XV
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Actions to be Taken in Case of Abnormalities

WARNING
Do not repair the instrument even though the instrument becomes faulty.
Doing so may result in electric shock or injury. In addition, the instrument repaired by the
user without permission will be exempt from the warranty.
Should the instrument be dropped or damaged, turn OFF the power switch on the
instrument, disconnect the power plug from the AC outlet and then contact your agent from
whom the instrument was purchased.
Continuing to use it may result in fire, electric shock or breakdown.
Should foreign items enter the instrument, turn OFF the power switch on the instrument,
disconnect the power plug from the AC outlet and then contact your agent from whom the
instrument was purchased.
Continuing to use it may result in fire, electric shock or breakdown.
Should smoke or odd smells be detected, turn OFF the power switch on the instrument,
disconnect the power plug from the AC outlet and then contact your agent from whom the
instrument was purchased.
Failure to observe this may result in fire, electric shock or breakdown.
If the power cord is damaged, contact the agent for replacement.
Continuing to use it may result in fire or electric shock.

Notes on Disposal

WARNING
When disposing of the instrument, do not put it into a fire.
Doing so may cause explosion, resulting in fire or burns.

CAUTION
The instrument uses a lithium battery for memory backup and a gallium arsenide battery
for the light source module. In addition, the liquid crystal display panel contains fluorescent
tubes.
So, disposal of the instrument must be carried out according to the laws and regulations of
the country and local authorities.

XVI
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Other Precautions
Notes on Backup Battery

CAUTION
The instrument uses a lithium battery for memory backup. The instrument may malfunction
suddenly due to battery life, therefore, early replacement of the battery is recommended.
The life of the battery is approximately five years.

Refer
For details on replacement of the backup battery, refer to page 1-29.

Notes on LCD Panel

CAUTION
This instrument uses a liquid crystal display panel. The display panel gradually becomes
unclear due to the backlight life. The LCD panel needs to be replaced when it becomes
unclear.
The life of the LCD panel is approximately three years.
Please contact the agent when the panel is no longer clear.
If the LCD display panel breaks and fluid leaks out, do not allow the fluid to come into
contact with the skin, eyes, or mouth. If fluid enters the eyes or mouth, rinse immediately
and thoroughly with tap water or some other type of clean water, then seek medical
attention immediately.

XVII
CONTENTS

Structure of this Manual


Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INSTRUMENT
Explains the names and functions of each part of the instrument, and how to carry out
daily maintenance.

Chapter 2 BEFORE STARTING MEASUREMENT


Explains how to set up the instrument.

Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS


Explains how to set measurement conditions and how to measure optical fiber cables.

Chapter 4 ENTERING CHARACTERS


Explains how to enter label and file names.

Chapter 5 EDITING AUTOMATIC SEARCH RESULTS


The instrument has a function that detects events in the measurement results
automatically at the end of measurement. This chapter explains how to edit the detection
results.

Chapter 6 FILE OPERATION


Explains how to use (e.g. open, delete) files saved to a storage medium.

Chapter 7 USING USEFUL FUNCTIONS


This instrument has various useful functions. This chapter explains these functions.

Chapter 8 USING OPTIONS AND EXTERNAL DEVICES


Explains how to use options and external devices (e.g. USB printer) and how to control the
instrument from a personal computer.

Chapter 9 SPECIFICATIONS
Explains the specification of the instrument itself, optical module and options.

Chapter 10 APPENDIX
Explains corrective actions to be carried out in case of breakdown. Also provides a list of
technical terms regarding the instrument.

XVIII
CONTENTS

Contents

Preface..................................................................................................... I

Warranty ................................................................................................. II

Conventions Used in this Manual ....................................................... III


Safety Graphic Marks .............................................................................................................III
Other Graphic Marks ............................................................................................................. IV

Safety Precautions ................................................................................ V


For Safe Use of Laser Products ............................................................................................. V
Notes on Power Supply ........................................................................................................ VII
Notes on Operating Environment and Conditions .................................................................. XI
Notes on Installation ............................................................................................................. XII
Other Precautions ...............................................................................................................XVII

Structure of this Manual...................................................................XVIII


Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INSTRUMENT ............................................................XVIII
Chapter 2 BEFORE STARTING MEASUREMENT .........................................................XVIII
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS ................................................................XVIII
Chapter 4 ENTERING CHARACTERS ...........................................................................XVIII
Chapter 5 EDITING AUTOMATIC SEARCH RESULTS ..................................................XVIII
Chapter 6 FILE OPERATION ..........................................................................................XVIII
Chapter 7 USING USEFUL FUNCTIONS .......................................................................XVIII
Chapter 8 USING OPTIONS AND EXTERNAL DEVICES ..............................................XVIII
Chapter 9 SPECIFICATIONS ..........................................................................................XVIII
Chapter 10 APPENDIX ...................................................................................................XVIII

XIX
CONTENTS

Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INSTRUMENT............................... 1-1


1.1 What is the AQ7260?................................................................................. 1-2
1.2 Installation, Storage and Transport ......................................................... 1-3
Unpacking and Receiving Inspection ...................................................................................1-3
Notes on Storage .................................................................................................................1-4
Notes on Transport...............................................................................................................1-5
1.3 Power Supply............................................................................................. 1-7
1.4 Daily Maintenance ..................................................................................... 1-8
Cleaning the Exterior of the Instrument ................................................................................1-8
Cleaning the Optical Connector ...........................................................................................1-9
Cleaning the Optical Adapter.............................................................................................. 1-11
1.5 Replacing the Optical Module ................................................................ 1-12
Removing the Optical Module ............................................................................................1-12
Attaching a New Optical Module ........................................................................................1-16
1.6 Replacing the Optical Adapter ............................................................... 1-20
Removing the Optical Adapter............................................................................................1-20
Attaching a New Optical Adapter........................................................................................1-21
1.7 Replacing the Battery Pack .................................................................... 1-23
Removing the Battery Pack................................................................................................1-23
Attaching a New Battery Pack ............................................................................................1-25
1.8 Charging the Battery Pack ..................................................................... 1-27
1.9 Replacing the Backup Battery................................................................ 1-29
1.10 Names of Instrument Parts..................................................................... 1-32
Front View ..........................................................................................................................1-32
Rear View...........................................................................................................................1-34
Top View.............................................................................................................................1-36
Right Side View ..................................................................................................................1-37
Accessories........................................................................................................................1-38
Options...............................................................................................................................1-39
1.11 Screen Display......................................................................................... 1-40
Description of Screen Display ............................................................................................1-40
Meaning of Each Part of the Trace .....................................................................................1-44
1.12 Notes Before Performing Measurement ................................................ 1-46
When Using AQ7261 / AQ7264 / AQ7265 / AQ7269 ..........................................................1-46

XX
CONTENTS

Chapter 2 BEFORE STARTING MEASUREMENT ........................... 2-1


2.1 Changing System Settings .......................................................................2-2
Displaying the Setting Change Window............................................................................... 2-3
Changing Settings ............................................................................................................... 2-4
Restoring the Default System Settings .............................................................................. 2-48

Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS................................... 3-1


3.1 Flow of Measurement Steps......................................................................3-2
3.2 Turning ON the Power [Step 1] .................................................................3-3
When Using AC Power ........................................................................................................ 3-4
When Using the Battery Pack.............................................................................................. 3-5
3.3 Warming Up the Instrument [Step 2] ........................................................3-6
3.4 Connecting an Optical Fiber to the Instrument [Step 3] ......................3-7
Cleaning the Optical Connector and Adapter....................................................................... 3-7
Connecting the Optical Fiber ............................................................................................... 3-8
3.5 Setting the Measurement Conditions/Auto Search Conditions [Step 4]
3-9
Displaying the Measurement Condition Change Window .................................................. 3-10
Changing the Measurement Conditions ............................................................................ 3-12
Changing the Measured Data Auto Saving Conditions ...................................................... 3-34
Changing the Auto Search Conditions ............................................................................... 3-36
Notes on Changing of Measurement Conditions / Auto Search Conditions ....................... 3-51
Restoring the Default Measurement Conditions / Auto Search Conditions ........................ 3-53
3.6 Setting the File Name/Location to Store the File [Step 5].....................3-54
3.7 Measuring an Optical Fiber [Step 6].......................................................3-55
Performing Real Time Measurement ................................................................................. 3-56
Performing Average Measurement .................................................................................... 3-57
When the Trace Contains a Lot of Noise ........................................................................... 3-59
3.8 Checking the Measured Data [Step 7] ....................................................3-64
Basic Operations ............................................................................................................... 3-64
When “AUTO” is Selected for “EVENT SEARCH” ............................................................. 3-69
When “MANUAL” is Selected for “EVENT SEARCH” ........................................................ 3-72
3.9 Recording the Measured Data [Step 8] ..................................................3-89
Saving the Measured Data ................................................................................................ 3-89
Printing the Measured Data ............................................................................................. 3-105
3.10 Turning OFF the Power [Step 9] ...........................................................3-108
Turning OFF the Power ................................................................................................... 3-108
Disconnecting the Optical Fiber....................................................................................... 3-109

XXI
CONTENTS

Chapter 4 ENTERING CHARACTERS .............................................. 4-1


4.1 Entering Characters .................................................................................. 4-2
Displaying the Label Input Window ......................................................................................4-3
Entering a Label ...................................................................................................................4-4
4.2 Editing Characters .................................................................................... 4-7
Deleting a Character ............................................................................................................4-7
Changing a Character ..........................................................................................................4-8
Adding a Character ..............................................................................................................4-9

Chapter 5 EDITING AUTOMATIC SEARCH RESULTS .................... 5-1


5.1 Editing an Event ........................................................................................ 5-2
Inserting an Event ................................................................................................................5-3
Deleting an Event .................................................................................................................5-6
Moving an Event ..................................................................................................................5-9
5.2 Editing an Event Marker ......................................................................... 5-12
5.3 Editing the Event List.............................................................................. 5-15
Displaying the List Edit Window .........................................................................................5-16
Editing the Event List..........................................................................................................5-18
5.4 Attaching a Comment to an Event ......................................................... 5-23
5.5 Changing the Conditions and Performing Auto Search Again............ 5-25
Displaying the Auto Search Condition Change Window .....................................................5-26
Changing the Auto Search Conditions................................................................................5-28
Notes on Changing of Auto Search Conditions ..................................................................5-38

Chapter 6 FILE OPERATION............................................................. 6-1


6.1 File Operation ............................................................................................ 6-2
Saving a File ........................................................................................................................6-2
Recalling a File.....................................................................................................................6-3
Deleting a File ......................................................................................................................6-7
Printing a File .....................................................................................................................6-12
Copying a File ....................................................................................................................6-18
6.2 Using the Utility Functions ..................................................................... 6-22
Initializing a Drive ...............................................................................................................6-23
Deleting a Folder ................................................................................................................6-25
Creating a Folder ...............................................................................................................6-27
Copying a Folder ................................................................................................................6-30

XXII
CONTENTS

Chapter 7 USING USEFUL FUNCTIONS.......................................... 7-1


7.1 Initializing the Vertical-/Horizontal-Axis Scales.......................................7-2
7.2 Displaying Approximate Lines..................................................................7-3
For Traces that Have Been Auto Searched ......................................................................... 7-4
For Traces that Have Not Been Auto Searched................................................................... 7-6
7.3 Using the Cursor Link Function ...............................................................7-7
For Traces that Have Been Auto Searched ......................................................................... 7-8
For Traces that Have Not Been Auto Searched................................................................. 7-10
7.4 Using the Label Fixed Form Input Function ..........................................7-11
7.5 Using the Label Auto Increment Function .............................................7-13
7.6 Entering Various Information for the Measured Trace..........................7-16
Displaying the Detailed Information Input Window ............................................................ 7-17
Entering Detailed Information ............................................................................................ 7-18
7.7 Changing the Distance Reference..........................................................7-27
For Traces that Have Been Auto Searched ....................................................................... 7-28
For Traces that Have Not Been Auto Searched................................................................. 7-31
7.8 Using the Event Fix Function .................................................................7-33
7.9 Using the Section Analysis Function .....................................................7-36
7.10 Manipulating Two or More Traces ..........................................................7-39
Displaying Multiple Traces ................................................................................................. 7-40
Displaying the Subtract Trace of Two Traces..................................................................... 7-43
Merging Two Traces .......................................................................................................... 7-45
7.11 Using the Light Source Function............................................................7-47
Displaying the Light Source Function Window................................................................... 7-48
Changing the Wavelength and Modulation Frequency ...................................................... 7-49
Emitting a Laser................................................................................................................. 7-51
Turn off a Laser ................................................................................................................. 7-51
7.12 Making a Measurement Continuously Changing the Wavelengths .....7-52

Chapter 8 USING OPTIONS AND EXTERNAL DEVICES ................ 8-1


8.1 Using Options ............................................................................................8-2
Option Unit........................................................................................................................... 8-3
8.2 Using External Devices .............................................................................8-9
USB Keyboard................................................................................................................... 8-10
PCMCIA Memory Card ...................................................................................................... 8-13
USB Printer........................................................................................................................ 8-16
USB Storage Medium ........................................................................................................ 8-21

XXIII
CONTENTS

8.3 Operating the Instrument from a Personal Computer.......................... 8-22


Operation by using RS-232C .............................................................................................8-23
Operation by using GP-IB ..................................................................................................8-30
Control Commands ............................................................................................................8-37
Request Commands...........................................................................................................8-50
Return Value Format ..........................................................................................................8-63
Command Input Examples (RS-232C) ...............................................................................8-65

Chapter 9 SPECIFICATIONS............................................................. 9-1


9.1 Specifications of main frame.................................................................... 9-2
9.2 Specifications of optical modules ........................................................... 9-4
9.3 Specifications of optional units ............................................................... 9-8
9.4 Outside view drawings.............................................................................. 9-9
AQ7260 OTDR ...................................................................................................................9-10
AQ7261 SMF MODULE ..................................................................................................... 9-11
AQ7264 SMF MODULE .....................................................................................................9-12
AQ7265 SMF MODULE .....................................................................................................9-13
AQ7269 SMF/MMF MODULE ............................................................................................9-14
PRINTER/FDD UNIT..........................................................................................................9-15
PRINTER UNIT ..................................................................................................................9-16

Chapter 10 APPENDIX .................................................................... 10-1


10.1 Software Upgrade.................................................................................... 10-2
10.2 Checking the Software version .............................................................. 10-5
10.3 Troubleshooting ...................................................................................... 10-6
When the Instrument Appears Faulty .................................................................................10-6
When the Problem Cannot Be Solved................................................................................10-8
10.4 Glossary................................................................................................... 10-9
Attenuation .........................................................................................................................10-9
Attenuation dead zone .......................................................................................................10-9
Back scattering ray.............................................................................................................10-9
Connection point ..............................................................................................................10-10
Dead zone........................................................................................................................10-10
Distance measuring accuracy ..........................................................................................10-10
Distance range .................................................................................................................10-10
Dynamic range ................................................................................................................. 10-11
Event dead zone .............................................................................................................. 10-11
Event list........................................................................................................................... 10-11
Event note ........................................................................................................................ 10-11

XXIV
CONTENTS

Far end ............................................................................................................................ 10-12


Fault location ................................................................................................................... 10-12
Filter ................................................................................................................................ 10-12
Format ............................................................................................................................. 10-12
Fresnel reflection ............................................................................................................. 10-12
Group index ..................................................................................................................... 10-13
Label................................................................................................................................ 10-13
Least squares approximate (LSA) ................................................................................... 10-13
Near end.......................................................................................................................... 10-13
OTDR .............................................................................................................................. 10-13
Pulse width ...................................................................................................................... 10-14
Real time measurement................................................................................................... 10-14
Reflection point................................................................................................................ 10-14
Resolution........................................................................................................................ 10-14
Return loss ...................................................................................................................... 10-15
S/N .................................................................................................................................. 10-15
Sampling count................................................................................................................ 10-15
Sampling resolution ......................................................................................................... 10-15
Secondary reflection ........................................................................................................ 10-16
Spatial resolution ............................................................................................................. 10-16
Splice loss........................................................................................................................ 10-16
Two Point Approximate (TPA).......................................................................................... 10-16

XXV
Chapter 1
BEFORE USING THE INSTRUMENT

1.1 What is the AQ7260? ............................................................................................... 1-2


1.2 Installation, Storage and Transport ........................................................................... 1-3
1.3 Power Supply ........................................................................................................... 1-7
1.4 Daily Maintenance.................................................................................................... 1-8
1.5 Replacing the Optical Module................................................................................. 1-12
1.6 Replacing the Optical Adapter ................................................................................ 1-20
1.7 Replacing the Battery Pack .................................................................................... 1-23
1.8 Charging the Battery Pack...................................................................................... 1-27
1.9 Replacing the Backup Battery ................................................................................ 1-29
1.10 Names of Instrument Parts..................................................................................... 1-32
1.11 Screen Display ....................................................................................................... 1-40
1.12 Notes Before Performing Measurement ................................................................. 1-46
Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INSTRUMENT

1.1 What is the AQ7260?


This instrument emits a light pulse into an optical fiber and searches faults from the end of
the fiber, then calculates transmission loss effectively by detecting back scattering rays
caused by Rayleigh scattering inside the fiber, and rays reflecting at connection points and
fault points.
Since the optical section comes in a module, an appropriate optical module can be
selected according to the wavelength and type of optical fiber to be used.
This instrument also can be used for light source depend on the mounted optical module.

1-2
Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INSTRUMENT

1.2 Installation, Storage and Transport


This section explains points to be observed when installing, storing or transporting the
instrument.

Unpacking and Receiving Inspection


Prior to shipment, the instrument has undergone strict mechanical and electrical
inspection to ensure its correct operation. On delivery, immediately unpack and check the
instrument for any damage that might have occurred during transport.

Mechanical Inspection

After the instrument is unpacked, check the appearance, operation of each switch and
connector, and check for any damage or defects that might have occurred during
transport. In addition check that all the accessories are present and correct.

TIP
It is recommended that packing materials, such as corrugated boxes and
cushioning materials, be kept in a safe place so that they can be reused when
transporting the instrument again.

Operation Inspection

If no defects are found by mechanical inspection, check the instrument to see whether it
conforms to the specifications.

When Damage or Defects are Found

If damage or non-conformation to the specifications is found during mechanical or


operation inspection, contact the agent from whom the instrument was purchased.

1-3
Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INSTRUMENT

Notes on Storage
This section explains points to be observed when storing the instrument for a long period
of time.

Notes Before Storage

Dust, fingerprints, dirt and stains etc. collected on the instrument must be wiped off with a
piece of cloth.
Carry out operation inspection to check that the instrument operates correctly.

Refer For the method of cleaning the exterior of the instrument, refer to page 1-8.

Storage Conditions

When storing the instrument, make sure it is stored under the following environmental
conditions.

• Temperature −20 to 60°C


• Humidity 95%RH or less (No condensation allowed)
• Temperature/humidity does not change excessively throughout the day.
• Areas where the instrument will not be exposed to direct sunlight
• Areas where there is little dust
• Low-humidity areas where no water drops are generated or collect on the instrument
• Areas where the instrument will not be exposed to active gases or oxidized.

Caution If you are not going to use the instrument for a long period of time, store it with the
battery pack removed. Furthermore, when storing the instrument outside the above
temperature range, make sure that the battery pack is removed.

Refer For the method of removing the battery pack, refer to page 1-23.

Notes When Re-Using the Instrument

When using the instrument again after storing it for a long period of time, first carry out
operation inspection to check that the instrument operates correctly.

1-4
Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INSTRUMENT

Notes on Transport
This section explains points to be observed when transporting the instrument.

Repacking

To repack the instrument, the packing materials used to deliver the instrument must be
used. If they have been discarded or damaged, pack the instrument as explained below.

1. Wrap the instrument with a thick vinyl sheet to prevent entry of dust.

2. Place cushioning material on projecting parts on the bottom and front/rear


panels of the instrument to protect them.

3. Prepare a corrugated, wooden or aluminum box that is large enough to


accommodate the instrument and allows 10 to 15 cm space between the surface
of each part of the instrument (top, bottom, front, rear, right/left panels) and the
sides of the box.

4. Put shock-absorbent materials at the bottom of the box to absorb shocks, such
as vibration.

5. Place the instrument in the center of the box and fill the spaces (between the
box’s internal surface and each surface of the instrument: top, front, rear,
right/left panels) with shock absorbent materials.

6. Secure the outside of the box with packing cord, adhesive tape or bands.

Caution The instrument must be packed so that any impact or vibration on the instrument is
50G or less. If the instrument is exposed to impact or vibration exceeding 50G, the
instrument may get damaged. In particular, take care not to let any excessive
pressure be exerted on the LCD.

TIP
It is recommended that packing materials used to deliver the instrument be kept in
a safe place. Using these materials will facilitate packing work when transporting
the instrument.

1-5
Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INSTRUMENT

Transport

During transport, make sure that vibration is avoided and the required storage conditions
are satisfied.

Refer
For details on the storage conditions, refer to page 1-4.

Caution When the battery pack is transport by using aircraft. Pleas each package contains
12 battery pack or less. However, airlines refuse transport battery packs. Please
inquire to the airline in advance.

1-6
Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INSTRUMENT

1.3 Power Supply


The instrument can run on AC power (AC battery is supplied with the instrument) or
battery pack.
The AC adapter must be connected to an AC power outlet (100 to 240 V, 50/60Hz).
Necessary measures must be taken to prevent the following.

• Accident by electric shock


• Internal damage of the instrument by abnormal voltage

1-7
Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INSTRUMENT

1.4 Daily Maintenance


The instrument can be used for many years if daily maintenance is carried out properly.
Daily maintenance is also important to prevent trouble and breakdowns.
This section explains how to clean the following items.

• Exterior of the instrument


• Optical connector
• Optical adapter

Cleaning the Exterior of the Instrument


Wet a cloth with lukewarm water, squeeze it thoroughly, wipe the LCD and exterior of the
instrument with it, and then wipe the instrument with dry cloth.

Caution
•Before carrying out daily maintenance, make sure that the power is turned OFF.

•Do not use chemicals such as thinner, benzene and alcohol. Use of such
chemicals may cause deterioration or discoloration of the exterior of the instrument.

•To prevent entry of water into the instrument, the wet cloth must be firmly
squeezed before it is used to wipe the exterior.

1-8
Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INSTRUMENT

Cleaning the Optical Connector


The end of the optical connector must be kept clean at all times. Collection of dust or dirt
on the end may damage the optical adapter of the instrument, hindering correct
measurement.
This section explains how to clean the end of the optical connector by taking a FC
connector as an example.

1. Place the end of the optical connector perpendicular to the cleaner’s cleaning
surface.

2. With the end of the optical connector pushed against the cleaning surface, turn
it approximately one turn.

3. Then, slide the end of the optical connector.

4. Repeat steps 2 to 3 to clean the end of the optical connector.

Caution
When cleaning the optical connector, make sure that it is pushed against the
cleaner firmly. If not, the optical connector may not be cleaned sufficiently.

1-9
Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INSTRUMENT

TIP
•To check the condition of the end of the optical connector, use of a surface check
microscope (x200 to x400) is helpful.

•Various cleaners designed for optical fiber cables are available, including
“OPTICAL FIBER CONNECTOR CLEANER” manufactured by NTT-ME.

Product Name Appropriate Connector Types


CLETOP reel-type A SC, FC, ST, DIN, D4
CLETOP reel-type B MT, Biconic
CLETOP spare tape ----------
CLETOP stick-type ----------

1-10
Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INSTRUMENT

Cleaning the Optical Adapter


This section explains how to clean the optical adapter.

1. Make sure that the power to the instrument is turned OFF.

WARNING
Never clean the instrument if the power is ON. Laser beams are invisible to the naked
eye, but if they enter the eyes, they may cause impaired eyesight.

Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified


herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

Refer
For the method of turning OFF the power, refer to page 3-108.

2. Slide the optical connector cover on the top of the instrument to open it.

3. Clean the outer surface inside the optical adapter using a special cleaning stick.
Also clean the end of the optical fiber with a special cleaning stick.

Special cleaner
CLETOP
Stick-Type

Cover of
optical fiber
cable connector

Front shell

TIP Various cleaners designed for optical adapters are available, including “CLETOP
Stick-Type” manufactured by NTT-ME.

1-11
Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INSTRUMENT

1.5 Replacing the Optical Module


This section explains how to replace the optical module with a new one.

Removing the Optical Module

Caution
The optical module cannot be replaced if the expansion unit is connected.

Refer
For the method of removing the expansion unit, refer to page 8-5.

AQ7261 / AQ7264 / AQ7265

1. Make sure that the power to the instrument is turned OFF.

WARNING
Do not replace the optical module while the instrument is powered ON.
Failure to observe this may result in electric shock or breakdown.

Refer
For the method of turning OFF the power, refer to page 3-108.

1-12
Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INSTRUMENT

2. Remove the optical module cover.


Loosen the four screws shown below counter-clockwise.

3. Lift the optical module cover straight to remove it.

4. Remove the optical module.


Loosen the three screws shown below counter-clockwise. Then, pull out the optical
module as shown below to remove it.

OPTICAL knob
MODULE

knob

CAUTION
When removing the optical module, lift the two knobs slowly at the same time to detach
them. Never shake it sideways or remove it by force.
Doing so may damage the connector.
Take care not to touch the connector on the optical module or the one on the instrument.
Doing so may result in breakdown.

1-13
Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INSTRUMENT

AQ7269

1. Make sure that the power to the instrument is turned OFF.

WARNING
Do not replace the optical module while the instrument is powered ON.
Failure to observe this may result in electric shock or breakdown.

Refer
For the method of turning OFF the power, refer to page 3-108.

2. Remove the optical module cover.


Loosen the four screws shown below counter-clockwise.

3. Lift the optical module cover straight to remove it.

1-14
Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INSTRUMENT

4. Remove the optical module.


Loosen the three screws shown below counter-clockwise. Then, pull out the optical
module as shown below to remove it.

CAUTION
When removing the optical module, lift the two knobs slowly at the same time to detach
them. Never shake it sideways or remove it by force.
Doing so may damage the connector.
Take care not to touch the connector on the optical module or the one on the instrument.
Doing so may result in breakdown.

5. Attach the blank panel.

CAUTION
Use the attached screws with the blank panel.
Size of the screws are M3 (5[mm]). 5mm
If the screws that exceed 5 [mm] in lengths are used, they may cause a failure

1-15
Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INSTRUMENT

Attaching a New Optical Module


This section explains how to attach a new optical module. It is assumed that the optical
module and its cover have been removed.

AQ7261 / AQ7264 / AQ7265

1. Make sure that the power to the instrument is turned OFF.

WARNING
Do not replace the optical module while the instrument is powered ON.
Failure to observe this may result in electric shock or breakdown.

Refer
For the method of turning OFF the power, refer to page 3-108.

2. Connect the optical module’s connector to the one on the optical module.

CAUTION
When attaching the optical module, insert the connector slowly. Never shake the connector
sideways or insert it by force.
Doing so may damage the connector.

1-16
Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INSTRUMENT

3. Fix the optical module.


Tighten the three screws shown below clockwise to secure the optical module.

Caution Make sure that the screws are tightened firmly.

4. Attach the optical module cover.


Tighten the four screws shown below clockwise.

Caution Make sure that the screws are tightened firmly.

1-17
Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INSTRUMENT

AQ7269

1. Make sure that the power to the instrument is turned OFF.

WARNING
Do not replace the optical module while the instrument is powered ON.
Failure to observe this may result in electric shock or breakdown.

Refer
For the method of turning OFF the power, refer to page 3-108.

2. Detach the blank panel.

Caution Keep the detached screws.

3. Connect the optical module’s connector to the one on the optical module.

CAUTION
When attaching the optical module, insert the connector slowly. Never shake the connector
sideways or insert it by force.
Doing so may damage the connector.

1-18
Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INSTRUMENT

4. Fix the optical module.


Tighten the three screws shown below clockwise to secure the optical module.

Caution Make sure that the screws are tightened firmly.

5. Attach the optical module cover.


Tighten the four screws shown below clockwise.

Caution Make sure that the screws are tightened firmly.

1-19
Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INSTRUMENT

1.6 Replacing the Optical Adapter


This section explains how to replace the optical adapter with a new one.

Removing the Optical Adapter

Refer
Refer to the Cautions given on page 1-22.

1. Make sure that the power to the instrument is turned OFF.

WARNING
Do not replace the optical adapter while the power to the instrument is ON.
Should the laser emit and enter the eyes, they may be seriously damaged or loss of
eyesight may result.

Refer
For the method of turning OFF the power, refer to page 3-108.

2. Slide the optical connector cover on the top of the instrument to open it.

3. Push the optical adapter’s lock lever inward to unlock the adapter.

4. Lift the adapter to pull it out.

Cover of
1 optical fiber
cable connector
Lock lever
Front shell

1-20
Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INSTRUMENT

Attaching a New Optical Adapter

Refer
Refer to the Cautions given on page 1-22.

1. Make sure that the power to the instrument is turned OFF.

WARNING
Do not replace the optical adapter while the power to the instrument is ON.
Should the laser emit and enter the eyes, they may be seriously damaged or loss of
eyesight may result.

Refer
For the method of turning OFF the power, refer to page 3-108.

2. Slide the optical connector cover on the top of the instrument to open it.

3. Insert the new optical adapter straight into the rear shell.

4. Push the optical adapter’s lock lever outward to lock the adapter.

1-21
Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INSTRUMENT

CAUTION
• Take care not to damage the end of the optical fiberl.
If the end of the optical fiber is damaged, correct measurement may no longer be
possible or the optical fiber to be measured may also be damaged.
• When removing/inserting the optical adapter, it must be removed/inserted slowly.
Shaking it sideways or removing/inserting by force may not only damage the optical
adapter, but also damage the ferrule on the optical connector.

1-22
Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INSTRUMENT

1.7 Replacing the Battery Pack


This section explains how to replace the battery pack with a new one.

Removing the Battery Pack

1. Make sure that the power to the instrument is turned OFF.

WARNING
Do not replace the battery pack while the power to the instrument is ON.
Failure to observe this may result in electric shock or breakdown.

Refer For the method of turning OFF the power, refer to page 3-108.

2. Open the battery pack protecting rubber.

1-23
Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INSTRUMENT

3. Remove the battery pack bracket.


Loosen the screw shown below counter-clockwise to remove the bracket.

CAUTION
When removing the bracket, make sure that the right side of the instrument is not facing
the floor.
Doing so may cause the battery pack to drop, resulting in damage.

4. Remove the battery pack.

CAUTION
Do not touch the electrodes on the removed battery pack.
Doing so may result in breakdown.

1-24
Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INSTRUMENT

Attaching a New Battery Pack


This section explains how to attach a new battery pack. It is assumed that the battery pack
bracket has been removed.

1. Make sure that the power to the instrument is turned OFF.

WARNING
Do not replace the battery pack while the power to the instrument is ON.
Failure to observe this may result in electric shock or breakdown.

Refer For the method of turning OFF the power, refer to page 3-108.

2. Insert a new battery pack into the instrument.

Caution
Make sure that the battery pack is inserted in the correct direction.

1-25
Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INSTRUMENT

3. Attach the battery pack bracket.


Tighten the screw shown below clockwise to secure the bracket.

Caution
Make sure that the screw is tightened firmly.

4. Close the battery pack protecting rubber.

CAUTION
Make sure that the battery pack protecting rubber is closed firmly.
Failure to observe this may result in breakdown.

1-26
Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INSTRUMENT

1.8 Charging the Battery Pack


This section explains how to charge the battery pack.
When there is insufficient power in the battery pack, charge it as explained below.

Caution
Charging of the battery pack must be performed at temperatures of 5°C to 35°C.
Charging outside this temperature range may not only deteriorate the battery
pack’s performance or shorten its life, but in the worst case may also prevent start
of charging. The CHARGE LED blinks if charging is not yet started.

The remaining power in the battery pack can be seen on the power indicator
located in the lower right corner of the screen.

Fully charged Insufficient remaining power

The following message appears when there is insufficient power in the battery
pack.

Low battery.
Please use AC adapter,
or replace the charged battery.

Push any key.

Take the required actions according to the above message. If the required actions
are not taken within a few minutes following the appearance of the above message,
the following message will appear and the power will be turned OFF automatically.

Low battery.
OTDR will shutdown in 10 sec.

When the battery pack is heated, the instrument prevents to charge the battery. If
the battery pack is heated. Please remove the battery pack. After the temperature
become cool to room temperature and insert battery pack.

1-27
Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INSTRUMENT

Refer For the method of removing the battery pack, refer to page1-23.

1. Make sure that the power to the instrument is turned OFF.

Refer
For the method of turning OFF the power, refer to page 3-108.

2. With the battery pack installed in the instrument, connect the AC adapter to the
instrument.

Refer •For the method of attaching the battery pack, refer to page 1-25.

•For the method of connecting the AC adapter, refer to page 3-4.

3. Insert the AC adapter’s power plug into an AC power outlet.


Charging of the battery pack will start.

CAUTION
Do not insert the AC adapter’s power plug into an AC power outlet if the power to the
instrument is ON.
Failure to observe this may result in breakdown.

TIP
The CHARGE LED will be lit steadily while the battery pack is charged, and will go
out when charging is complete.

1-28
Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INSTRUMENT

1.9 Replacing the Backup Battery


This section explains how to replace the backup battery with a new one.
The backup battery must be replaced with a new one periodically, since it may cause
sudden malfunctions due to its battery life even though the instrument is working properly.
The backup battery must be replaced approximately every five years.

Caution
•When the backup battery is replaced, the date and time will be initialized.

•The battery model “CR2032” must be used.

1. Make sure that the power to the instrument is turned OFF.


WARNING
Do not replace the backup battery while the power to the instrument is ON.
Failure to observe this may result in electric shock or breakdown.

Refer
For the method of turning OFF the power, refer to page 3-108.

2. Remove the optical module cover and then remove the optical module.

Refer
For the method of removing the optical module and its cover, refer to page 1-12.

1-29
Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INSTRUMENT

3. Remove the battery.


3-1. Slide the battery as shown below.
3-2. Pull up the battery

Caution
When removing the backup battery, take care not to short-circuit the instrument.

4. Insert a new battery.

Caution
Make sure that the battery is inserted in the correct direction. The printing board
side is minus.

1-30
Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INSTRUMENT

5. Attach the optical module and then attach its cover.

Refer
For the method of attaching the optical module and its cover, refer to page 1-16.

CAUTION
The instrument uses a lithium battery for memory backup.
So, disposal of the instrument must be carried out according to the laws and regulations of
the country and local authorities.

1-31
Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INSTRUMENT

1.10 Names of Instrument Parts


This section explains the name and function of each part of the instrument (front, rear, top
and right side panels). It also explains standard accessories and options.

Front View

1 2

13

14

15

13 12 9

11 10

Caution
The instrument uses a color LCD (hereafter called LCD). A filter plate is attached to
the front surface of the LCD for protection. However, if the filter plate is exposed to
strong impact, it may crack or the LCD itself may be damaged, so special care
must be taken when handling it.

1-32
Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INSTRUMENT

No. Name Description


1 LCD * 8.4-inch color TFT (640 x 480 dots). Measured trace, measurement
conditions and measured values are displayed.
2 MODE key Used to switch the operation mode.
3 Rotary knob Used to move the distance cursor or increase/decrease entered values.
Holding down the key will allow you to move the distance cursor at
different speeds.
4 SCALE key Used to enlarge/reduce the trace size or shift the trace.
5 ENTER key Used to confirm entered values etc.
6 Arrow key Used to move the trace, enlarge/reduce the trace size, or change
entered values.
7 REAL TIME key Starts/stops real-time measurement.
8 AVERAGE key Starts/stops average measurement.
9 PRINT key Prints out the information displayed on the screen.
10 FILE key Used for file operation (saving, deleting, recalling).
11 ESC key Used to cancel the operation or restore the previous screen contents.
12 Function keys Performs the function inscribed on each key.
13 Shoulder belt fixture Used to attach a shoulder belt to the instrument.
14 CHARGE LED Lit while the battery pack is charged.
When the battery pack is full charged, the LED is off.
It blinks if the battery pack has not been charged or if it is in critical
condition.
15 POWER LED Lit while the power to the instrument is ON.
When the instrument is running on the battery pack, this LED turns from
green to red when there is insufficient power in the battery pack.

*: The LCD may contain some pixels that are always ON or always OFF (0.002% or fewer
of all pixels including RGB). Please understand that this does not indicate a malfunction.

Conventions Used in This Manual

In this manual, each key is expressed as follows.

[key name]

Example

[ENTER]

1-33
Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INSTRUMENT

Rear View

1 2 3 4

No. Name Description


1 Optical adapter Used to connect the optical fiber to be measured.
2 Optical adapter cover Used to protect the optical adapter when the fiber to be measured is not
(main port) connected.
3 Optical adapter cover Used to protect the optical adapter in the sub port.
(sub port)
4 Module sub port Used when AQ7269 module is connected.
5 Expansion unit port Used to connect an expansion unit.
6 Stand Used to support the instrument when it is placed on a desk etc.

Caution Class 1M laser invisible radiation when optical adapter cover open. *1

Do not view directly with optical instruments.

*1: When measuring or Light source function ON

CATION

CLASS 1M INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN


DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

1-34
Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INSTRUMENT

WARNING
When no optical fiber is connected, make sure that the optical adapter cover is closed.
Laser beams are invisible to the naked eye, but if they enter the eyes, they may cause
impaired eyesight.

CAUTION
When carrying the instrument, do not carry it by the stand.
Doing so may damage the instrument.

1-35
Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INSTRUMENT

Top View

1
2

3 4 5 6

No. Name Description


1 Sub module port Used when AQ7269 module is connected.
2 Optical adapter Used to connect the optical fiber to be measured.
3 DC power connector Used to connect the AC adapter.
4 Power switch Used to turn ON/OFF the power to the instrument.
5 PCMCIA slot Used to insert an optional IC card etc.
6 USB connector (host side) Used to connect FDD or memory.
2 ports
7 USB connector (function side) Now, not available.

Caution
•Two USB ports (host side) are available, but do not connect a storage medium or
printer to both ports.

•Now, USB connector (function side) is not available.

1-36
Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INSTRUMENT

Right Side View

No. Name Description


1 Optical module cover Used to protect the optical module
2 Battery pack section Used to accommodate a battery pack.

1-37
Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INSTRUMENT

Accessories
This section explains the accessories supplied with the instrument.

Battery pack Shoulder belt User’s Manual

Blank panel

TIP
The blank panel may be attached to the AQ7260.

1-38
Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INSTRUMENT

Options
The section explains the options that can be purchased individually.

AC adapter AC power cord Battery pack

Optical module Optical module Soft carrying case


(Standard size) (Double size)

Universal adapter AQ9441 (*)

Expansion Unit

Printer/FDD unit Printer unit

1-39
Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INSTRUMENT

1.11 Screen Display


This section explains screen display.

Description of Screen Display


The main screen displays the measured trace and measurement conditions.
The name and function of each part of the screen are explained below.

1
14

13 6
3 18

16

11

5 8 9

17

4 15
7 10 12

1-40
Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INSTRUMENT

No. Name Description


1 MODE Highlights the currently selected mode.
2 Display start level Displays the vertical-axis display start level (above the trace display
section).
3 Vertical-axis scale Displays the value per grid along the vertical axis.
4 Measurement conditions Displays various measurement conditions.
5 Display start distance Displays the horizontal-axis display start distance (left to the trace
display section).
6 Cursor distance Displays the distance from the origin to the cursor point.
7 Guidance Displays outline of the operation.
8 Horizontal-axis scale Displays the value per grid along the horizontal axis.
9 SMP Displays the sampling resolution.
10 Calculated values Displays the calculation results obtained from the measurement data.
11 Display end distance Displays the horizontal-axis display end distance (right to the trace
display section).
12 Overall trace Displays a measured trace for the entire measured range in simplified
format. The part displayed in the main screen will be enclosed by a
frame.
13 Label Displays the entered label.
14 Date Displays the current date and time.
15 Power Displays the currently used power.
Battery mark: The instrument is running on the battery pack.
== AC ==: The instrument is running on AC power.
16 Function keys Displays the functions of the current function keys.
17 Hierarchy level Displays the hierarchy level of the operation.
The larger the tag count, the lower the hierarchy level.
18 Distance origin marker Displays the position of the distance origin.

1-41
Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INSTRUMENT

Display of Measurement Conditions

Name Description
LNK Displayed when the cursor link function is currently enabled.
20k Displays the currently selected data size.
5k: 5k mode
20k: 20k mode
60k: 60k mode
LSA Displays the currently selected approximate method.
LSA: Least squares approximate
TPA: Two point approximate
FIL Displayed when the filter function is currently enabled.
REF Displayed when the distance origin marker is currently set.
HRE Displays the currently selected average method.
HRE: High return loss average
NOM: Normal average
HSP: High speed average
WAVELENGTH Displays the wavelength to be used for measurement.
Dist. RANGE Displays the distance range to be used for measurement.
PULSE WIDTH Displays the width of light pulse to be used for measurement.
ATTENUATION Displays the value set to restrict increase of the light to be measured.
AVERAGE Displays the currently selected average time or average interval.
GROUP INDEX Displays the currently selected group index.

1-42
Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INSTRUMENT

Function Keys and Hierarchy Level Display

When [MODE] is pressed, the function menu for currently selected mode will be displayed.
The function keys are displayed in one of the three shapes, for each of which execution
format has been set.
Execution format for each shape is explained below.

Shape Description
When a function key of this shape is pressed, a function window
(lower-hierarchy window) relating to the function will appear.
The number of tags indicating the hierarchy level is also increased by
one. To return to the previous hierarchy level, press [ESC] * 1

When a function key of this shape is pressed, a window allowing you to


change the currently set values or setting conditions will appear.

When a function key of this shape is pressed, the function indicated on


the key will be executed.

*1

Higher Lower
hierarchy hierarchy
level level

[ESC] [ESC] [ESC]

1-43
Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INSTRUMENT

Meaning of Each Part of the Trace

Near
Reflection
end Splice loss

Far end

Near end
Connection point between the instrument and optical fiber and its surrounding area

Far end
The end of an optical fiber cable and its surrounding area
If the end of the optical fiber cable cannot be detected due to noise, “far end” indicates
the cross point of the noise and optical fiber and its surrounding area.

Splice loss
Explained on the next page.

Reflection
Explained on the next page.

1-44
Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INSTRUMENT

Splice Loss

Splice loss occurs at areas where the optical fiber cable is fusion spliced.

Spliced area



Approximate
Splice loss straight line

Refer
For details on approximate straight line, refer to pages 3-81 and 3-85.

Reflection

Reflection occurs at areas where the optical fiber cable is connected by a connector or
areas where the optical fiber is cut off.
Reflection level is often expressed by return loss.

Cut-off area

Refer
For detail on return loss, refer to page 10-15.

1-45
Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INSTRUMENT

1.12 Notes Before Performing Measurement


This section explains points to note when measuring a communication system. The
following points must be observed when performing measurement.

When Using AQ7261 / AQ7264 / AQ7265 / AQ7269


These modules perform measurement by using the same wavelength as that used for
communications. Thus, if the optical fiber to be measured contains communication light,
communications will be affected. Furthermore, measurement cannot be performed
correctly by this instrument. So, the measurement environment (presence/absence of
communication light) must be taken sufficiently into account when using these modules.
For the wavelength used by the modules, refer to “Chapter 9 Specifications”.
The AQ7265 is available when the software version of the AQ7260 main frame is 2.00 or
later; the AQ7269 is available when the software version of the AQ7260 main frame is
2.04 or later.

CAUTION
Special care must be taken when using these modules since devices connected to the system
to be
measured may be damaged depending on total power of the light.

Caution
• Special care must be taken not to allow communication failure. Should
communication failure occur by mistake by the user, YOKOGAWA will not accept
responsibility arising from that communication failure.

• The AQ7260 main frame can use AQ7265 module at the software version 2.00 or
later.

• The AQ7260 main frame can use AQ7269 module at the software version 2.04 or
later.

Refer
Procedure of checking software version, refer to page 10-5.

Furthermore, take care not to allow any external light to enter the instrument.

CAUTION
Entry of external light may result in damage to the instrument.

1-46
Chapter 2
BEFORE STARTING MEASUREMENT

2.1 Changing System Settings ....................................................................................... 2-2


Chapter 2 CHANGING SYSTEM SETTINGS

2.1 Changing System Settings


This chapter explains how to change the following system settings.

• Changing the Display Language


• Changing the Trace Type
• Changing the Cursor Type
• Changing the Grid Setting
• Changing the Second Cursor Setting
• Changing the Trace Form Setting
• Changing the Distance Unit
• Changing the Distance Reference Mark Type
• Changing the Number of dB Display Digits
• Changing the Display Color
• Displaying the level value at the cursor
• Hiding the marker distance display
• Changing the Date/Time
• Changing the Lockout Setting
• Changing the Alarm Sound Setting
• Changing the Power Save Setting
• Changing the LCD Brightness
• Changing the Print Type
• Changing the Print Color
• Zooming the cursor distance display
• Changing the Fiber Module(MMF/SMF)

2-2
Chapter 2 CHANGING SYSTEM SETTINGS

Displaying the Setting Change Window


This section explains how to display the window by which system settings can be
changed.

1. Make sure there is no measurement currently in progress.

Caution
If measurement is in progress, it is not possible to change system parameter
settings.

2. Press [MODE] to locate the cursor to “SETTING”.


A window allowing you to change system settings will appear.

2-3
Chapter 2 CHANGING SYSTEM SETTINGS

Changing Settings
This section explains how to change the setting for each parameter.

TIP
The system settings are retained in the internal memory even if the instrument is
turned OFF. So, when the instrument is turned ON, the system settings in effect just
before the instrument was turned OFF last time will be restored.

Changing the Display Language

The display language can be changed as explained below.


♦ Example: “ENGLISH” → “日本語”

1. Locate the cursor to “LANGUAGE” by using the rotary knob or the arrow key.

TIP
The cursor is already at “LANGUAGE” when the setting change window appears.

2. Press [ENTER].
A selection window will appear.

TIP
Selectable 日本語 Displays characters in Japanese.
languages * ENGLISH Displays characters in English.
*: Indicates the default setting.

2-4
Chapter 2 CHANGING SYSTEM SETTINGS

3. Locate the cursor to “日本語” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

4. Press [ENTER] to register the change made to the language setting.

Caution
The change will not be registered if [ESC] is pressed instead of [ENTER].

2-5
Chapter 2 CHANGING SYSTEM SETTINGS

Changing the Trace Type

The trace type can be changed as explained below.


♦ Example: “LINE” → “DOT”

1. Locate the cursor to “TRACE TYPE” by using the rotary knob or the arrow key.

2. Press [ENTER].
A selection window will appear.

TIP
Selectable *LINE Displays the trace in line form.
trace types DOT Displays the trace in dot form.
*: Indicates the default setting.

3. Locate the cursor to “DOT” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

4. Press [ENTER] to register the change made to the trace type.

Caution
The change will not be registered if [ESC] is pressed instead of [ENTER].

2-6
Chapter 2 CHANGING SYSTEM SETTINGS

TIP
When “LINE” is selected

When “DOT” is selected

2-7
Chapter 2 CHANGING SYSTEM SETTINGS

Changing the Cursor Type

The cursor type can be changed as explained below.


♦ Example: “CROSS(+)” → “LINE( | )”

1. Locate the cursor to “CURSOR” by using the rotary knob or the arrow key.

2. Press [ENTER].
A selection window will appear.

TIP
Selectable *CROSS(+) Displays the cursor by a cross (+).
cursor types LINE( | ) Displays the cursor by a line ( | ).
*: Indicates the default setting.

3. Locate the cursor to “LINE( | )” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

4. Press [ENTER] to register the change made to the cursor type.

Caution
The change will not be registered if [ESC] is pressed instead of [ENTER].

2-8
Chapter 2 CHANGING SYSTEM SETTINGS

TIP
When “CROSS(+)” is selected

When “LINE( | )” is selected

2-9
Chapter 2 CHANGING SYSTEM SETTINGS

Changing the Grid Setting

The grid setting can be changed as explained below.


♦ Example: “DISPLAY” → “NonDISPLAY”

1. Locate the cursor to “GRID” by using the rotary knob or the arrow key.

2. Press [ENTER].
A selection window will appear.

TIP
Selectable NonDISPLAY Hides the grid.
grid settings *DISPLAY Shows the grid.
*: Indicates the default setting.

3. Locate the cursor to “NonDISPLAY” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

4. Press [ENTER] to register the change made to the grid setting.

Caution
The change will not be registered if [ESC] is pressed instead of [ENTER].

2-10
Chapter 2 CHANGING SYSTEM SETTINGS

TIP
When “DISPLAY” is selected

When “NonDISPLAY” is selected

2-11
Chapter 2 CHANGING SYSTEM SETTINGS

Changing the Second Cursor Setting

Before explaining how to change the setting, an explanation is given below about the
second cursor.
The second cursor is used to check for the secondary reflection.
The secondary reflection makes an event look as if it were present in places where it is
actually not.

I II III

1 4
2
3

3
4

Distance L
Distance 2L

Assuming that excessive reflection occurs at point II

Mechanism of generation of secondary reflection


A pulsed ray that is output at point I advances toward point II.

The ray (1) reflecting on the spliced surface at point II reflects again on the spliced
surface at point I and advances toward point II (2).
The instrument acquires 1 as data.

Due to the ray 2, a reflection ray (3) is generated again on the spliced surface at
point II.
The instrument acquires 3 as data.

Since all the reflection rays (1, 3, 4) are measured by the instrument, 3 is also acquired
as data in the same way as those that are actually generated, and is displayed. As a
result, the secondary reflection makes an event look as if it were present in places where it
is actually not.

2-12
Chapter 2 CHANGING SYSTEM SETTINGS

The second cursor can be changed as explained below.


♦ Example: “NonDISPLAY” → “DISPLAY”

1. Locate the cursor to “SECOND CURSOR” by using the rotary knob or the arrow
key.

2. Press [ENTER].
A selection window will appear.

TIP
Selectable second *NonDISPLAY Hides the second cursor.
cursor settings DISPLAY Shows the second cursor.
*: Indicates the default setting.

3. Locate the cursor to “DISPLAY” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

4. Press [ENTER] to register the change made to the second cursor.

Caution
The change will not be registered if [ESC] is pressed instead of [ENTER].

2-13
Chapter 2 CHANGING SYSTEM SETTINGS

TIP
When “NonDISPLAY” is selected

secondary reflection

When “DISPLAY” is selected

second cursor

The second cursor is displayed at a position twice as far as the distance from the
zero point as the cursor.

2-14
Chapter 2 CHANGING SYSTEM SETTINGS

Changing the Trace Form Setting

Before explaining how to change the setting, an explanation is given below about trace
form.
This instrument can acquire data of maximum 60,000 points. However, since the number
of dots on the LCD is limited, it is not possible to display all the acquired data at the same
time. Therefore, the instrument employs methods to display only the selected data. The
following four display methods are available.

• DECIMATION
• MAXIMUM
• MEAN
• ENVELOPE

Before explaining each display method, an explanation is given below about the data
display section of the instrument. The instrument uses 500 dots (horizontal direction) on
the LCD to display the acquired data. So, the data quantity per dot can be calculated as
follows.

Data quantity per dot = Acquired data quantity / 500

If the data size is 60,000 points, the data quantity assigned per dot will be 120 points.

Refer
For the method of changing the data size, refer to page 3-28.

The procedure to choose and display data (120 points) assigned for each dot is shown
below for each display method.

DECIMATION
The data to be displayed on each dot is the first data of those assigned for each dot.
1st dot: Display the first data.
2nd dot: Display the 121st data.
y
y
y
499th dot: Display the 59761st data.
500th dot: Display the 59881st data.
However, the data on which the marker or the cursor is located and the data of reflection
points are preferentially displayed.

2-15
Chapter 2 CHANGING SYSTEM SETTINGS

MAXIMUM
The data to be displayed on each dot is the maximum reflection level value among the
data assigned to each dot.
1st dot: Display the maximum value among the 1st to 120th data.
2nd dot: Display the maximum value among the 121st to 240th data.
y
y
y
499th dot: Display the maximum value among the 59761st to 59880th data.
500th dot: Display the maximum value among the 59881st to 60000th data.

MEAN
The data to be displayed on each dot is the mean value of all the data assigned to each
dot.
1st dot: Displays the mean value among the 1st to 120th data.
2nd dot: Displays the mean value among the 121st to 240th data.
y
y
y
499th dot: Displays the mean value among the 59761st to 59880th data.
500th dot: Displays the mean value among the 59881st to 60000th data.

ENVELOPE
The data to be displayed on each dot is the maximum and minimum reflection level values
among the data assigned for each dot by turns. The maximum and minimum values are
linked by a straight line.
1st dot: Displays the maximum values among the 1st to 120th data.
2nd dot: Displays the minimum values among the 121st to 240th data.
y
y
y
499th dot: Displays the maximum values among the 59761st to 59880th data.
500th dot: Displays the minimum values among the 59881st to 60000th data.

2-16
Chapter 2 CHANGING SYSTEM SETTINGS

The trace form can be changed as explained below.


♦ Example: “DECIMATION” → “MAXIMUM”

1. Locate the cursor to “TRACE FORM” by using the rotary knob or the arrow key.

2. Press [ENTER].
A selection window will appear.

TIP
*DECIMATION
Selectable MEAN
race forms MAXIMUM
ENVELOPE
*: Indicates the default setting.

3. Locate the cursor to “MAXIMUM” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

4. Press [ENTER] to register the change made to the trace form.

Caution
The change will not be registered if [ESC] is pressed instead of [ENTER].

2-17
Chapter 2 CHANGING SYSTEM SETTINGS

Changing the Distance Unit

The distance unit can be changed as explained below.


♦ Example: “km” → “mile”

1. Locate the cursor to “DIST. UNIT” by using the rotary knob or the arrow key.

2. Press [ENTER].
A selection window will appear.

TIP
*km
Selectable
mile
distance units
kf
*: Indicates the default setting.

3. Locate the cursor to “mile” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

4. Press [ENTER] to register the change made to the distance unit.

Caution
The change will not be registered if [ESC] is pressed instead of [ENTER].

2-18
Chapter 2 CHANGING SYSTEM SETTINGS

Changing the Distance Reference Mark Type

The distance reference mark type can be changed as explained below.


♦ Example: “LINE” → “ARROW”

Refer
For the method of changing the distance reference, refer to page 7-27.

1. Locate the cursor to “DIST. REF. MARK” by using the rotary knob or the arrow
key.

2. Press [ENTER].
A selection window will appear.

TIP

Selectable *LINE
mark types ARROW
*: Indicates the default setting.

3. Locate the cursor to “ARROW” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

4. Press [ENTER] to register the change made to the distance reference mark type.

Caution The change will not be registered if [ESC] is pressed instead of [ENTER].

2-19
Chapter 2 CHANGING SYSTEM SETTINGS

TIP
When “LINE” is selected

When “ARROW” is selected

2-20
Chapter 2 CHANGING SYSTEM SETTINGS

Changing the Number of dB Display Digits

The number of dB display digits can be changed as explained below.


♦ Example: “∗∗.∗∗∗” → “∗∗.∗∗”

1. Locate the cursor to “dB DIGIT” by using the rotary knob or the arrow key.

2. Press [ENTER].
A selection window will appear.

TIP
∗∗.∗ Displays dB with one decimal place.
Selectable
∗∗.∗∗ Displays dB with two decimal places.
dB digits
*∗∗.∗∗∗ Displays dB with three decimal places.
*: Indicates the default setting.

3. Locate the cursor to “∗∗.∗∗” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

4. Press [ENTER] to register the change made to the number of dB display digits.

Caution
The change will not be registered if [ESC] is pressed instead of [ENTER].

2-21
Chapter 2 CHANGING SYSTEM SETTINGS

Changing the Display Color

The display color can be changed as explained below.


♦ Example: “COLOR3” → “B&W”

1. Locate the cursor to “DISPLAY” by using the rotary knob or the arrow key.

2. Press [ENTER].
A selection window will appear.

TIP
*COLOR1
Selectable COLOR2
display colors COLOR3
B&W
*: Indicates the default setting.

3. Locate the cursor to “B&W” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

4. Press [ENTER] to register the change made to the display color.

Caution
The change will not be registered if [ESC] is pressed instead of [ENTER].

2-22
Chapter 2 CHANGING SYSTEM SETTINGS

Displaying the Level Value at the Cursor

The cursor dB display function displays the level value at the location of the cursor on
the screen. This is convenient for checking such things as the amount of relative
change of a level in a numerical format.

Caution
The cursor dB number is a value that is relative to the grid lines on
screen. It does not indicate absolute values such as the amount of
reflection or optical input level.

The following describes the procedure for showing or hiding the cursor dB display.

♦ Example: “DISPLAY” → “NonDISPLAY”

1. Move the cursor to “CURSOR dB” by using the rotary knob or the arrow
key.

2. Press [ENTER]. A selection window will appear.

TIP
Selectable *NonDISPLAY Hides the cursor dB.
cursor dB settings DISPLAY Shows the cursor dB.
*: Indicates the default setting.

3. Move the cursor to “DISPLAY” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

4. Press [ENTER] to register the change made to the cursor dB display.

Caution
The change will not be registered if [ESC] is pressed instead of [ENTER].

2-23
Chapter 2 CHANGING SYSTEM SETTINGS

TIP
When “DISPLAY” is selected

When “NonDISPLAY” is selected

2-24
Chapter 2 CHANGING SYSTEM SETTINGS

Hiding the Marker Distance Display

When markers are displayed, the distance position of each marker is shown in the
upper right part of the waveform screen by default, but this can be turned ON and OFF.
It can be helpful to turn the marker distance/position display OFF in cases such as if it
overlaps with a waveform.

The following describes the procedure for turning the marker distance display in the
upper right part of the screen OFF.

♦ Example: “DISPLAY” → “NonDISPLAY”

1. Move the cursor to “MARKER DIST.” by using the rotary knob or the arrow
key.

2. Press [ENTER]. A selection window will appear.

TIP
Selectable marker *NonDISPLAY Hides the marker distance in the upper right part.
distance settings DISPLAY Shows the marker distance in the upper right part.
*: Indicates the default setting.

3. Move the cursor to “Non DISPLAY” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

4. Press [ENTER] to register the change made to the marker distance display.

Caution
The change will not be registered if [ESC] is pressed instead of [ENTER].

2-25
Chapter 2 CHANGING SYSTEM SETTINGS

TIP
When “NonDISPLAY” is selected

When “DISPLAY” is selected

2-26
Chapter 2 CHANGING SYSTEM SETTINGS

Changing the Date/Time Display Format

The date/time display format can be changed as explained below.


♦ Example: “2004.APR.30 12:00” → “2004.4.30 12:00”

1. Locate the cursor to “TYPE” by using the rotary knob or the arrow key.

2. Press [ENTER].
A selection window will appear.

TIP
APR.30.2004 12:00 Displays the date/time in order of MONTH (alphabet), DAY
and YEAR.
4.30.2004 12:00 Displays the date/time in order of MONTH (numeric), DAY
and YEAR.
30.APR.2004 12:00 Displays the date/time in order of DAY, MONTH (alphabet)
and YEAR.
Selectable
display 30.4.2004 12:00 Displays the date/time in order of DAY, MONTH (numeric)
formats and YEAR.
*2004.APR.30 12:00 Displays the date/time in order of YEAR, MONTH (alphabet)
and DAY.
2004.4.30 12:00 Displays the date/time in order of YEAR, MONTH (numeric)
and DAY.
NonDISPLAY Hides the date/time.
*: Indicates the default setting.

The date/time displayed in the selection window is an example only to show how it
will look, not the actual date/time.
The date/time can be changed in the [INPUT] field.

3. Locate the cursor to “2004.4.30 12:00” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

2-27
Chapter 2 CHANGING SYSTEM SETTINGS

4. Press [ENTER] to register the change made to the date/time display format.

Caution
The change will not be registered if [ESC] is pressed instead of [ENTER].

TIP
The selected display format will be reflected on the current time (displayed in the
upper right corner of the screen), and date/time for the file list.

2-28
Chapter 2 CHANGING SYSTEM SETTINGS

Changing the Date/Time

The date/time can be changed as explained below.


♦ Example: “2006.SEP.7 15:08” → “2007.SEP.7 15:50”

1. Locate the cursor to “INPUT” by using the rotary knob or the arrow key.

2. Press [ENTER].
The following window will appear.

2-29
Chapter 2 CHANGING SYSTEM SETTINGS

3. Change the year.


3-1. Locate the cursor to “YEAR” by using the rotary knob or [W] / [X].
3-2. Press [ENTER].
A selection window will appear.
3-3. Locate the cursor to “2007” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].
3-4. Press [ENTER] to register the change made to the year.

4. Change the minute.


4-1. Locate the cursor to “MINUTE” by using the rotary knob or [W] / [X].
4-2. Press [ENTER].
A selection window will appear.
4-3. Locate the cursor to “50” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].
4-4. Press [ENTER] to register the change made to the minute.

TIP The month, day and hour can be changed in the same way as year and minute.

5. Press [F1](DONE) to register the change made to the date/time .

Caution The change will not be registered if [ESC] is pressed instead of [ENTER].

2-30
Chapter 2 CHANGING SYSTEM SETTINGS

Changing the Lockout Setting

The lockout function is to prevent the preset measurement conditions and system settings
being changed by other operators. If this function is enabled, the measurement conditions
and system settings cannot be changed.
The lockout setting can be changed as explained below.
♦ Example: “OFF” → “ON” (setting the lockout code to “7260”)

1. Locate the cursor to “LOCKOUT” by using the rotary knob or the arrow key.

2. Press [ENTER].
A selection window will appear.

TIP
Selectable *OFF Disables the lockout function.
lockout settings ON Enables the lockout function.
*: Indicates the default setting.

3. Locate the cursor to “ON” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

2-31
Chapter 2 CHANGING SYSTEM SETTINGS

4. Press [ENTER].
The following window will appear.

5. Enter a lockout code (4-digit code) as follows. In this example, “7260” is


entered.
5-1 Locate the cursor to “7” by using the rotary knob or [W] / [X].
5-2 Press [ENTER].
5-3 Locate the cursor to “2” by using the rotary knob or [W] / [X].
5-4 Press [ENTER].
5-5 Locate the cursor to “6” by using the rotary knob or [W] / [X].
5-6 Press [ENTER].
5-7 Locate the cursor to “0” by using the rotary knob or [W] / [X].
5-8 Press [ENTER].
5-9 Press the [F1](DONE) key.

Caution
The lockout code must be a 4-digit number.

2-32
Chapter 2 CHANGING SYSTEM SETTINGS

6. Enter the same lockout code again.


Enter it according to steps 5-1 to 5-9.

Caution
y The lockout function will be enabled when the same lockout code is entered at
both steps 5 and 6.

y Do not forget the lockout code. It will be required when disabling the function.

Disabling the Lockout Function

1. Perform steps 1 and 2.

2. Select “OFF” in the selection window.

3. Enter the same lockout code.

4. Press the [F1] (DONE) key.

2-33
Chapter 2 CHANGING SYSTEM SETTINGS

Changing the Alarm Sound Setting

If this setting is enabled (ON), the buzzer will sound when a warning message is
displayed.
The alarm sound setting can be changed as explained below.
♦ Example: “ON” → “OFF”

1. Locate the cursor to “ALARM SOUND” by using the rotary knob or the arrow
key.

2. Press [ENTER].
A selection window will appear.

TIP
Selectable OFF Disables the buzzer.
alarm sound settings *ON Enables the buzzer.
*: Indicates the default setting.

3. Locate the cursor to “OFF” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

4. Press [ENTER] to register the change made to the alarm sound setting.

Caution
The change will not be registered if [ESC] is pressed instead of [ENTER].

2-34
Chapter 2 CHANGING SYSTEM SETTINGS

Changing the Power Save Setting

The power save function is to save power consumption by turning OFF the LCD display’s
backlight automatically when the instrument is ON but not operated for a certain period of
time.
The power save setting can be changed as explained below.
♦ Example: “OFF” → “3min”

1. Locate the cursor to “POWER SAVE” by using the rotary knob or the arrow key.

2. Press [ENTER].
A selection window will appear.

TIP
*OFF Disables the power save function.
Enables the power save function if no keys are pressed
30sec
for 30 seconds.
Enables the power save function if no keys are pressed
1min
for 1 minute.
Selectable
Enables the power save function if no keys are pressed
3min
power save for 3 minutes.
settings Enables the power save function if no keys are pressed
5min
for 5 minutes.
Enables the power save function if no keys are pressed
10min
for 10 minutes.
Enables the power save function if no keys are pressed
20min
for 20 minutes.
*: Indicates the default setting.

2-35
Chapter 2 CHANGING SYSTEM SETTINGS

3. Locate the cursor to “3min” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

4. Press [ENTER] to register the change made to the power save setting.

Caution The change will not be registered if [ESC] is pressed instead of [ENTER].

TIP
The screen becomes darker when the power save function is ON.

Disabling the Power Save Function

1. Press any key.

2-36
Chapter 2 CHANGING SYSTEM SETTINGS

Changing the LCD Brightness

Ease of reading the LCD display varies considerably with its brightness.
The LCD brightness can be changed as explained below.
♦ Example: “NORMAL” → “DARK”

TIP
In general, each brightness mode has the following features.

BRIGHT
For outdoor, daytime, or other use.
The screen is easy to see even when the surroundings are light.
However, this mode consumes a lot of power.

When using the instrument by the battery pack only, always pay attention to the
remaining power of the battery pack.

DARK
For indoor or other use.
It can be used when the surroundings are dark.
When operating the instrument by the battery pack only, it can be operated
continuously and longer than “BRIGHT”.

1. Locate the cursor to “LCD BRIGHTNESS” by using the rotary knob or the arrow
key.

2-37
Chapter 2 CHANGING SYSTEM SETTINGS

2. Press [ENTER].
A selection window will appear.

TIP
BRIGHT
Selectable LCD
*NORMAL
brightness levels
DARK
*: Indicates the default setting.

3. Locate the cursor to “DARK” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

4. Press [ENTER] to register the change made to the LCD brightness.

Caution
The change will not be registered if [ESC] is pressed instead of [ENTER].

2-38
Chapter 2 CHANGING SYSTEM SETTINGS

Changing the Print Type

The print type can be changed as explained below.


♦ Example: “HORIZONTAL” → “SCREEN”

1. Locate the cursor to “PRINT TYPE” by using the rotary knob or the arrow key.

2. Press [ENTER].
A selection window will appear.

TIP
*HORIZONTAL Prints along the print direction.
The mode, function, time and guidance will not be printed.

Selectable VERTICAL Prints across the print direction.


print types The mode, function, time and guidance will not be printed.
SCREEN Prints across the print direction.
All the pieces of information displayed in the screen is printed.
*: Indicates the default setting.

3. Locate the cursor to “SCREEN” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

4. Press [ENTER] to register the change made to the print type.

Caution The change will not be registered if [ESC] is pressed instead of [ENTER].

2-39
Chapter 2 CHANGING SYSTEM SETTINGS

TIP

When “HORIZONTAL” is selected

When “VERTICAL” is selected When “SCREEN” is selected

2-40
Chapter 2 CHANGING SYSTEM SETTINGS

Changing the Print Color

The print color can be changed as explained below.


♦ Example: “B&W” → “DISPLAY”

Caution
Selection of print color is not possible if an expansion unit has been set in the
printer setting. Only black & white print is possible (B&W) if an expansion unit has
been set.

Refer
For the method for making printer settings, refer to page 8-6, 8-18.

1. Locate the cursor to “PRINT COLOR” by using the rotary knob or the arrow
key.

2. Press [ENTER].
A selection window will appear.

TIP
Selectable DISPLAY
Print colors B&W

3. Locate the cursor to “DISPLAY” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

4. Press [ENTER] to register the change made to the print color.

Caution
The change will not be registered if [ESC] is pressed instead of [ENTER].

2-41
Chapter 2 CHANGING SYSTEM SETTINGS

Zooming the Cursor Distance Display

You can zoom the cursor distance display that is shown after auto-detection.
This function is convenient when you only want to check the distance to the point of
fiber disconnection.

The following describes the procedure for zooming (changing the information display
of) the cursor distance display.

♦ Example: Changing information display; “Total information” → “Cursor distance.”

1. Check that measurement is stopped and a waveform is displayed.


If a waveform is not displayed, execute measurement or load a
waveform file.
2. Press [MODE], move the cursor to TRACE mode, then press [F3] (AUTO
SEARCH).

2-42
Chapter 2 CHANGING SYSTEM SETTINGS

3. Press [F3] (INFO. DISP.). A selection window will appear.

TIP
Selectable *Total information
Information display Cursor distance
*: Indicates the default setting.

Caution
If F1 (SCREEN) is TRACE or LIST, select TRACE+LIST. See P3-105 for
how to switch screens.

4. Move the cursor to “CUR. DIST.” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].
5. Press [ENTER] to register the change made to the information display.
The cursor distance is zoomed in the information display area.

Caution
The change will not be registered if [ESC] is pressed instead of [ENTER].

2-43
Chapter 2 CHANGING SYSTEM SETTINGS

TIP
When “CUR. DIST.” is selected

Distance from distance origin to cursor (zoomed)

When “TOTAL INFO.” is selected

2-44
Chapter 2 CHANGING SYSTEM SETTINGS

Changing the fiber module (MMF/SMF)

The AQ7269 Optical Module is equipped with the following two fiber modules.
• Multi mode fiber module (MMF)
• Single mode fiber module (SMF)

Caution
When the AQ7269 Optical Module is used, it is necessary to make settings for the
fiber module.

The fiber module setting can be changed as explained below.


♦ Example: “MMF(0.85μm/1.30μm)” → “SMF(1.31μm/1.55μm)”

1. Make sure there is no measurement currently in progress.

Caution
If measurement is in progress, it is not possible to change system parameter
settings.

2. Press [MODE] to move the cursor to “SETTING”.


A window allowing you to change system settings appears.

3. Press [F3](MODULE SELECT).


A selection window appears.

TIP
Selectable *MMF(0.85μm/1.30μm)
Module select SMF(1.31μm/1.55μm)
*: Indicates the default setting.

2-45
Chapter 2 CHANGING SYSTEM SETTINGS

4. Move the cursor to “SMF(1.31μm/1.55μm)” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

Caution
The output port changes when the fiber module is changed.

MMF SMF
OUTPUT OUTPUT

5. Press [ENTER] to register the change made to the fiber module.

Caution
The change will not be registered if [ESC] is pressed instead of [ENTER].

2-46
Chapter 2 CHANGING SYSTEM SETTINGS

TIP
When the fiber module is changed, the following measurement conditions are
applied.

Wavelength 0.85μm@MMF, 1.31μm@SMF


Auto set Auto Range
Dist. Range 5km@MMF, 40km@SMF
Pulse width 100ns@MMF, 500ns@SMF
Attenuation 5.00dB@MMF, 2.50dB@SMF
Ave condition Set value
Ave interval ( times) Set value
Group index 1.48000
Data size Set value
Average method Set value
Auto saving Set value
Event search Set value
Approx. method Set value
Backscatter -32.00dB@MMF, -50.00dB@SMF
Splice loss Set value
Return loss Set value
End of fiber Set value
Filter Set value
Plug check Set value
Ave. continue OFF

Refer Multi wl measure OFF

For the measurement conditions, refer to page 3-9.

2-47
Chapter 2 CHANGING SYSTEM SETTINGS

Restoring the Default System Settings


This section explains how to restore the default settings for all the system parameters.

1. Display the setting change window.

Refer
For the method of displaying the setting change window, refer to page 2-3.

2. Press [F1](INITIALIZE).
The following window will appear.

3. Press [F5](YES) to restore the default system settings.

TIP
The display language and date/time will remain unchanged.

2-48
Chapter 3
PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

3.1 Flow of Measurement Steps ..................................................................................... 3-2


3.2 Turning ON the Power [Step 1]................................................................................. 3-3
3.3 Warming Up the Instrument [Step 2]......................................................................... 3-6
3.4 Connecting an Optical Fiber to the Instrument [Step 3] ............................................ 3-7
3.5 Setting the Measurement Conditions/Auto Search Conditions [Step 4].................... 3-9
3.6 Setting the File Name/Location to Store the File [Step 5] ....................................... 3-54
3.7 Measuring an Optical Fiber [Step 6] ....................................................................... 3-55
3.8 Checking the Measured Data [Step 7] .................................................................... 3-64
3.9 Recording the Measured Data [Step 8] .................................................................. 3-89
3.10 Turning OFF the Power [Step 9] ........................................................................... 3-108
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

3.1 Flow of Measurement Steps


This section explains the flow of optical fiber measurement.

Step 1: Turning ON the Power

Step 2: Warming Up the Instrument

Step 3: Connecting an Optical Fiber to the Instrument

Step 4: Setting the Measurement Conditions/Auto


Search Conditions

Step 5: Setting the File Name / Select drive and folder to Store
the File

Step 6: Measuring an Optical Fiber

Step 7: Checking the Measured Data

Step 8: Recording the Measured Data

Step 9: Turning OFF the Power

WARNING

Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified


herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

3-2
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

3.2 Turning ON the Power [Step 1]


This section explains how to turn ON the power to the instrument.

Caution If the instrument has been stored outside the operating temperature range, do not
turn ON the power immediately. A temperature sensor is provided inside the
instrument. If the internal temperature is either too high or too low, a warning
message will appear, so take required action according to the message. If the
required actions are not taken, the power will be turned OFF forcibly to prevent
damage to the instrument. A similar message may also appear if the instrument is
operated at high or low temperatures.

3-3
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

When Using AC Power

Caution •If you are going to use AC power to operate the instrument, the battery pack must
be removed from the instrument.

•Using AC adapter is only indoors (0 to 40 °C). Don’t use outdoors.

Refer For the method of removing the battery pack, refer to page 1-23.

1. Read the “Safety Precautions” given at the beginning of this manual thoroughly
to ensure safety.

2. Connect the dedicated AC adapter to the instrument.

AC adapter

3. Insert the AC adapter’s power plug into an AC power outlet.

4. Press the power switch located on the top of the instrument to turn ON the
power.

TIP
The POWER LED will be lit while the power to the instrument is ON.

3-4
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

When Using the Battery Pack

Caution
•To prevent trouble with the battery pack, check its appearance periodically for
damage, such as cracks and deformation, and battery fluid leakage.

•If the charged battery pack is stored for a long period of time, the operating time
will be shortened due to natural discharge.

•To prevent over discharge, the battery pack must be charged periodically (every
other month).

•Charging of the battery pack must be performed at temperatures of 5°C to 35°C.


Charging outside this temperature range may not only deteriorate the battery
pack’s performance or shorten its life, but in the worst case may also prevent
charging.

•If you are not going to use the instrument for a long period of time, the battery
pack must be removed from the instrument. The battery pack must be stored in an
area of low humidity and at a temperature between −20°C and +60°C.

Refer
For the method of charging the battery pack, refer to page 1-27.

1. Read the “Safety Precautions” given at the beginning of this manual thoroughly
to ensure safety.

2. Press the power switch located on the top of the instrument to turn ON the
power.

TIP
•The POWER LED will be lit while the power to the instrument is ON.

•The remaining power in the battery pack can be seen on the power indicator
located in the lower right corner of the screen.

3-5
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

3.3 Warming Up the Instrument [Step 2]


After the instrument is powered ON (Step 1), warm up the instrument for 30 minutes to
stabilize it.

TIP
Warm-up operation will enable acquisition of more accurate measurement data.

3-6
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

3.4 Connecting an Optical Fiber to the Instrument


[Step 3]
This section explains how to connect the optical fiber to be measured to the instrument.

Cleaning the Optical Connector and Adapter

1. Check the type of the optical adapter.


Before cleaning the optical connector and adapter, make sure that the connector of
the optical fiber to be measured has the same type as that of the optical adapter. If
not, replace the optical adapter with one of the same type.

Refer
For the method of replacing the optical adapter, refer to page 1-20.

2. Clean the optical connector and adapter.

Refer
For the method of cleaning the optical connector and adapter, refer to pages 1-9
and 1-11.

3-7
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

Connecting the Optical Fiber


This section explains how to connect an optical fiber by taking an example of connecting a
FC connector.

1. Open the optical connector cover on the top of the instrument.

2. Fit the tab of the optical connector into the slot on the optical adapter, and
insert the connector into the adapter.

3. Turn the plug housing clockwise to secure the connector.

FC connector

CAUTION
When connecting the optical connector, gently insert it perpendicularly into the optical
adapter. Shaking it sideways or inserting it by force may not only damage the optical
adapter, but also damage the ferrule on the optical connector.

3-8
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

3.5 Setting the Measurement Conditions/Auto Search


Conditions [Step 4]
Before starting measurement of the optical fiber, it is necessary to set conditions under
which the measurement is to be performed. This section explains how to change the
following measurement conditions and auto search conditions.

• Wavelength
• Measurement condition auto set
• Distance range
• Pulse width
• Attenuation
• Average condition
• Average time / average interval
• Group index
• Data size
• Sampling Resolution
• Average method
• Auto saving
• Event search
• Approximate method
• Back scatter level
• Splice loss threshold
• Return loss threshold
• Fiber end threshold
• Filter
• Plug check
• Average measurement continue

3-9
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

Displaying the Measurement Condition Change Window


This section explains how to display the window by which the measurement conditions
can be changed.

1. Make sure there is no measurement currently in progress.

Caution
If measurement is in progress, some items cannot be changed.

2. Press [MODE] to locate the cursor to “TRACE”.

3. Press [F1](MEASURE CONDITION).


The following conditions can be changed using [F1] to [F4].
• Wavelength
• Distance range
• Pulse width
• Attenuation

Caution
•The distance range, pulse width and attenuation cannot be changed if “AUTO
RANGE” has been selected for AUTO SET.

•The attenuation cannot be changed if “AUTO ATTN” has been selected for AUTO
SET.

Refer For details on measurement condition auto setting, refer to page 3-14.

3-10
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

4. Press [F5](MEASURE CONDITION LIST).


The following measurement condition change window will appear.

3-11
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

Changing the Measurement Conditions

TIP
Measurement conditions will be retained in the internal memory even if the
instrument is turned OFF. So, when the instrument is turned ON, the measurement
conditions in effect immediately before the instrument was turned OFF previously
will be restored. However, this is not true if the optical module has been changed.

Changing the Wavelength

The wavelength can be changed as explained below.


♦ Example: “SM 1.31μm” → “SM 1.55μm”

1. Locate the cursor to “WAVELENGTH” by using the rotary knob or the arrow
key.

Caution
When F3 [MULTI WL MEASURE] is selected “ON”, the cursor can not move on
wavelength.

3-12
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

2. Press [ENTER].
A selection window will appear.

TIP
This instrument also allows setting multiple wavelengths and continuously
measures an optical fiber cable with the set wavelengths.

The wavelengths that can be set vary with the optical module used.

Optical module Selectable wavelengths


AQ7261 *SM 1.31μm, SM 1.55μm
AQ7264 *SM 1.31μm, SM 1.55μm
AQ7265 *SM 1.31μm, SM 1.55μm
MMF *MM 0.85μm, MM 1.30μm
AQ7269
SMF *SM 1.31μm, SM 1.55μm
*: Indicates the default setting.

Refer •For continuous measurement with multiple wavelengths, refer to page 7-52.

•For the procedures to set MMF/SMF when the AQ7269 is used, refer to page
2-45.

3. Locate the cursor to “SM 1.55μm” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

4. Press [ENTER] to register the change made to the wavelength.

5. Press [F4] (DONE) to register the changes made to the measurement


conditions.

TIP
When changing the condition for two or more items, it is recommended to change
the condition for each item first and then press [F4].

Refer
Refer to the notes given on changing the measurement conditions (page 3-51).

3-13
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

Changing the Measurement Condition Auto Setting

To simplify operation, the instrument provides a function that allows it to check the state of
the optical fiber at the start of measurement and set the following measurement conditions
automatically.

• Distance range
• Pulse width
• Attenuation

This measurement condition auto setting can be changed as explained below.


♦ Example: “OFF” → “AUTO RANGE”

1. Locate the cursor to “AUTO SET” by using the rotary knob or the arrow key.

2. Press [ENTER].
A selection window will appear.

TIP
OFF Performs measurement using the preset distance
range, pulse width and attenuation.
Selectable *AUTO RANGE Sets distance range, pulse width and attenuation
auto setting automatically at the start of measurement.
AUTO ATTN Sets attenuation automatically at the start of
measurement.

*: Indicates the default setting.

3-14
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

3. Locate the cursor to “AUTO RANGE” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

4. Press [ENTER] to register the change made to the measurement condition auto
setting.

5. Press [F4] (DONE) to register the changes made to the measurement


conditions.

TIP
When changing the condition for two or more items, it is recommended to change
the condition for each item first and then press [F4].

Refer
Refer to the notes given on changing the measurement conditions (page 3-51).

3-15
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

Changing the Distance Range

The distance range can be changed as explained below.


♦ Example: “40km” → “80km”

TIP
•The distance range cannot be changed if “AUTO RANGE” has been selected for
AUTO SET.

•A distance range that is longer than the optical fiber to be measured must be set.
Correct measurement will not be possible if a distance range shorter than the
optical fiber is set.

•The larger the distance range, the longer the measurement time.

1. Locate the cursor to “Dist. RANGE” by using the rotary knob or the arrow key.

3-16
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

2. Press [ENTER].
A selection window will appear.

TIP
The distance ranges that can be selected vary with the optical module and
wavelength used. The table below shows the distance ranges that can be selected
in the case of AQ7264 optical module.

Wavelength 1.31μm 1.55μm

2km 2km
Shorter
5km 5km
10km 10km
20km 20km
Selectable 40km 40km
distance ranges 80km 80km
160km 160km
240km 240km
320km 320km
Longer 640km

3. Locate the cursor to “80km” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

4. Press [ENTER] to register the change made to the distance range setting.

5. Press [F4] (DONE) to register the changes made to the measurement


conditions.

TIP
•When a new distance range is set, appropriate pulse width and attenuation will be
set automatically.

•When changing the condition for two or more items, it is recommended to change
the condition for each item first and then press [F4].

Refer
Refer to the notes given on changing the measurement conditions (page 3-51).

3-17
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

Changing the Pulse Width

The pulse width can be changed as explained below.


♦ Example: “100ns” → “200ns”

Caution The pulse width cannot be changed if “AUTO RANGE” has been selected for AUTO
SET.

TIP
The pulse width has the following features.

•Short pulse width:Enables measurement with high spatial resolution, but not
measurement at long distances.

•Long pulse width: Enables measurement at long distances, but not measurement
with high spatial resolution.

1. Locate the cursor to “PULSE WIDTH” by using the rotary knob or the arrow key.

3-18
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

2. Press [ENTER].
A selection window will appear.

TIP
The pulse widths that can be selected vary with the optical module, wavelength and
distance range selected. The table below shows the pulse widths that can be
selected in the case of AQ7264 optical module and wavelength of 1.55μm.

80km
2km 10km 160km
Distance range 40km
5km 20km 240km 640km

320km

Shorter 10ns 10ns 10ns 10ns 10ns


20ns 20ns 20ns 20ns 20ns
50ns 50ns 50ns 50ns 50ns
100ns 100ns 100ns 100ns 100ns
200ns 200ns 200ns 200ns 200ns
Selectable
500ns 500ns 500ns 500ns 500ns
pulse widths
1μs 1μs 1μs 1μs
4μs 4μs 4μs
10μs 10μs 10μs
Longer 20μs 20μs
50μs

3. Locate the cursor to “200ns” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

4. Press [ENTER] to register the change made to the pulse width setting.

5. Press [F4] (DONE) to register the changes made to the measurement


conditions.

TIP • When a new pulse width is set, appropriate attenuation will be set automatically.

•When changing the condition for two or more items, it is recommended to change
the condition for each item first and then press [F4].

Refer
Refer to the notes given on changing the measurement conditions (page 3-51).

3-19
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

Changing the Attenuation

If excessive reflection occurs at the optical connector’s connection point or optical fiber‘s
break point, the trace may be saturated. To prevent saturation of the trace, attenuation is
used.
The attenuation setting can be changed as explained below.
♦ Example: “0.00dB” → “10.00dB”

Caution The attenuation setting cannot be changed if “AUTO RANGE” or “AUTO ATTN” has
been selected for AUTO SET.

Refer
For details on saturation of trace, refer to “Checking the Return Loss” on page 3-86.

1. Locate the cursor to “ATTENUATION” by using the rotary knob or the arrow
key.

3-20
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

2. Press [ENTER].
A selection window will appear.

TIP
•If the trace is saturated, measurement cannot be performed with high sensitivity.

•The attenuations that can be selected vary with the optical module, wavelength
and pulse width selected. The table below shows the attenuations that can be
selected in the case of AQ7264 optical module and wavelength 1.55μm.

10ns 100ns 10μs


1μs
Pulse width 20ns 200ns 20μs
4μs
50ns 500ns 50μs

Smaller
0.00dB 0.00dB 0.00dB 0.00dB
Selectable to to to to
attenuations 16.25dB 20.00dB 23.75dB 26.25dB

Larger (1.25dB step) (1.25dB step) (1.25dB step) (1.25dB step)

3. Locate the cursor to “10.00dB” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

4. Press [ENTER] to register the change made to the attenuation setting.

5. Press [F4] (DONE) to register the changes made to the measurement


conditions.

TIP
•When changing the condition for two or more items, it is recommended to change
the condition for each item first and then press [F4].

Refer
Refer to the notes given on changing the measurement conditions (page 3-51).

3-21
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

Changing the Average Condition

Average condition means the method of averaging the data obtained by measurement.
The following two average methods are available.

• Averaging by intervals
• Averaging by times

The average condition can be changed as explained below.


♦ Example: “INTERVAL” → “TIMES 2^*”

Refer
For details on average measurement, refer to page 3-57.

1. Locate the cursor to “AVE CONDITION” by using the rotary knob or the arrow
key.

2. Press [ENTER].
A selection window will appear.

TIP
TIMES 2^*
Selectable
TIMES *k
average conditions
*INTERVAL
*: Indicates the default setting.

3. Locate the cursor to “TIMES 2^*” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

4. Press [ENTER] to register the change made to the average condition setting.

3-22
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

5. Press [F4] (DONE) to register the changes made to the measurement


conditions.

TIP
When changing the condition for two or more items, it is recommended to change
the condition for each item first and then press [F4].

Refer
Refer to the notes given on changing the measurement conditions (page 3-51).

3-23
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

Changing the Average Time/Average Interval

The average time can be changed as explained below.


♦ Example: “2^16” → “2^13”

1. Locate the cursor to “AVE TIMES”(*1) by using the rotary knob or the arrow key.
*1: “AVE TIME” is displayed if “TIMES 2^*” or “TIMES *k” is selected for “AVE
CONDITION”, and “AVE INTERVAL” will be displayed if “INTERVAL” is selected
for “AVE CONDITION”.

2. Press [ENTER].
A selection window will appear.

TIP
• The larger the average time/average interval, the higher the accuracy of
measurement results. However, measurement time will be prolonged, so an
appropriate average time/average interval must be set with the instrument’s
dynamic range and loss of optical fiber taken into account.

• The average time/average interval that can be set vary with the selected average
condition.
AVE CONDITION TIMES 2^* TIMES *k INTERVAL
2^10 1k times 10sec
Smaller 2^11 2k times 20sec
2^12 4k times *30sec
Selectable 2^13 8k times 1min
average time / *2^14 *16k times 3min
average interval 2^15 32k times 5min
2^16 65k times 10min
2^17 131k times 20min
Larger 2^18 262k times 30min

*: Indicates the default setting.

3-24
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

3. Locate the cursor to “2^13” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

4. Press [ENTER] to register the change made to the average time.

5. Press [F4] (DONE) to register the changes made to the measurement


conditions.

Caution Influenced by other measurement conditions, the actual averaging time may be
shorter than the set period.

TIP
When changing the condition for two or more items, it is recommended to change
the condition for each item first and then press [F4].

Refer
Refer to the notes given on changing the measurement conditions (page 3-51).

3-25
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

Changing the Group Index

The group index can be changed as explained below.


♦ Example: “1.48000” → “1.50000”

Caution •Distance calculation is performed using the group index. So measured distance
will not be accurate if the given group index is also not accurate.

•The group index for each wavelength is stored in the memory. So if the
wavelength is changed, the group index set for each wavelength will be displayed.

1. Locate the cursor to “GROUP INDEX” by using the rotary knob or the arrow key.

Caution When F3 [MULTI WL MEASURE] is selected “ON”, the cursor can not move on
group index.

2. Press [ENTER].
A selection window will appear.

TIP

1.00000
Selectable to
group index range 1.99999
(0.00001 step)

Default setting: 1.48000

3-26
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

3. Locate the cursor to “4” by using [W] / [X].

4. Change to “5” by using the rotary knob or [S].

5. Locate the cursor to “8” by using [W] / [X].

6. Change to “0” by using the rotary knob or [T].

7. Press [ENTER] to register the change made to the group index.

8. Press [F4] (DONE) to register the changes made to the measurement


conditions.

TIP
When changing the condition for two or more items, it is recommended to change
the condition for each item first and then press [F4].

Refer
Refer to the notes given on changing the measurement conditions (page 3-51).

3-27
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

Changing the Data Size

The data size can be changed as explained below.


♦ Example: “20k MODE” → “5k MODE”

1. Locate the cursor to “DATA SIZE” by using the rotary knob or the arrow key.

2. Press [ENTER].
A selection window will appear.

TIP
Data size has the following features.

Large data size: More accurate measured trace, but longer measurement time.

When the measured trace is saved in a file, the file size will be

large.

Small data size: Smaller file size and shorter measurement time.

However, some events may not be detected since the sampling

interval (i.e. interval at which data is acquired) gets longer.

5k MODE
Selectable
*20k MODE
data size
60k MODE

*: Indicates the default setting.

Caution The size of actually acquired data may differ from the selected data size due to
influences of the other measurement conditions.

3-28
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

3. Locate the cursor to “5k MODE” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

4. Press [ENTER] to register the change made to the data size.

5. Press [F4] (DONE) to register the changes made to the measurement


conditions.

TIP
When changing the condition for two or more items, it is recommended to change
the condition for each item first and then press [F4].

Refer
Refer to the notes given on changing the measurement conditions (page 3-51).

3-29
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

Changing the Sampling Resolution(SMP).

The sampling resolution is the distance interval at which data is acquired. It is linked
with the distance range setting, and is set automatically.
The following describes the procedure for changing the sampling resolution
independently of the distance range setting. The sampling resolution can be
shortened when analyzing portions of waveforms in detail.
The sampling resolution is displayed by SMP in the figure below.
The sampling resolution can be changed as explained below.

1. Press [MODE], move the cursor to “TRACE”.

2. Press [REALTIME]. Real time measurement will start.

3. During real time measurement, use the cross key to zoom the horizontal
scale. The sampling resolution display (SMP) changes each time you zoom
the scale. Note that the minimum resolution is 5 cm.

Refer
For the method of enlarging the trace along the horizontal-axis, refer to page
3-66.

Sampling resolution Measuring range

Caution
The border of the overall trace display is the measuring range.

3-30
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

Changing the Average Method

Before explaining how to change the setting, an explanation is given below regarding
average method.
This instrument allows use of the following three average methods.

• Hi-Speed
• Normal
• Hi-Return

Hi-Speed
This method is used to measure the entire area using the preset attenuation.
If excessive reflection occurs when the preset attenuation is not appropriate, that part of
the trace may be saturated.

There is a possibility that


this part of the trace is
saturated depending on
reflection level.

The entire area is measured using the


preset attenuation.

TIP
This method is recommended when measuring short optical fiber cables (no
reflection in the fiber).

Refer
For saturation of trace and the method of setting the attenuation, refer to page
3-88.

3-31
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

Normal
This method is used to obtain a satisfactory trace when measuring a long optical fiber, by
dividing the measurement area into blocks and setting an appropriate attenuation for each
block.
Division of the measurement area into blocks and setting of an appropriate attenuation for
each block are carried out automatically by the instrument. So, measurement time will be
longer compared to the total average method.
Furthermore, since the attenuation is set based on the back scatter level at the near end, if
excessive reflection occurs in a block the trace for that block may be saturated.

There is a possibility
that this part of the
trace is saturated
depending on
reflection level.

Each block is measured using own


attenuation.

TIP
This method is recommended when there is no excessive reflection in the optical
fiber to be measured.

Refer For details on saturation of trace, refer to page 3-88.

Hi-Return
Like the division average method, this method is used to measure each block using the
attenuation set for each block. Instead of setting attenuation for each block using the back
scatter level at the near end, it is set based on the back scatter level at each block. As a
result, measurement time will be longer compared to the division average method.
Division of the measurement area into blocks and setting of an appropriate attenuation for
each block are carried out automatically by the instrument.

3-32
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

The average method can be changed as explained below.


♦ Example: “NORMAL” → “Hi-RETURN”

1. Locate the cursor to “AVERAGE METHOD” by using the rotary knob or the
arrow key.

2. Press [ENTER].
A selection window will appear.

TIP
Hi-RETURN
Selectable
*NORMAL
average methods
Hi-SPEED

*: Indicates the default setting.

Caution The Hi-SPEED cannot be selected if “AUTO” has been selected for AVERAGE
CONDITION.

3. Locate the cursor to “Hi-RETURN” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

4. Press [ENTER] to register the change made to the average method.

5. Press [F4] (DONE) to register the changes made to the measurement


conditions.

TIP
When changing the condition for two or more items, it is recommended to change
the condition for each item first and then press [F4].

Refer
Refer to the notes given on changing the measurement conditions (page 3-51).

3-33
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

Changing the Measured Data Auto Saving Conditions


Changing the Measured Data Auto Saving Setting

Measured data auto saving is a function to save the acquired data in a specified storage
media after average measurement was done.

This section explains how to change the measured data auto saving setting.
♦ Example: “OFF” → “ON”

Refer
•For the method to perform an average measurement, refer to page 3-57.

•For the method to specify storage media, refer to page 3-92.

1. Locate the cursor to “AUTO SAVING” by using the rotary knob or the arrow key.

TIP
The cursor is already at “AUTO SAVING” when measurement condition change
window appears.

2. Press [ENTER].
A selection window will appear.

TIP
ON Measured data is saved after average
Selectable measurement was done.
auto saving *OFF Measured data is not saved after average
measurement was done.

*: Indicates the default setting.

3-34
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

3. Locate the cursor to “ON” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

4. Press [ENTER] to register the change made to the auto saving.

5. Press [F4] (DONE) to register the changes made to the measurement


conditions.

Caution If this function has been set to ON, the acquired data is automatically saved. So
make sure to set the saving condition prior to measurement.

TIP
When changing the condition for two or more items, it is recommended to change
the condition for each item first and then press [F4].

Refer • For the method to set the saving condition, refer to page 3-89.

• Refer to the notes given on changing the measurement conditions (page 3-51).

3-35
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

Changing the Auto Search Conditions


Changing the Event Search Setting

Event search is a function to automatically search for events in the acquired data after
average measurement was done.

The event search setting can be changed as explained below.


♦ Example: “AUTO” → “MANUAL”

1. Locate the cursor to “EVENT SEARCH” by using the rotary knob or the arrow
key.

2. Press [ENTER].
A selection window will appear.

TIP

*AUTO Searches events automatically at the end of average


measurement, and creates a table summarizing event
Selectable event information.
search setting
MANUAL Displays a trace at the end of average measurement, but
does not search events.
*: Indicates the default setting.

3. Locate the cursor to “MANUAL” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

4. Press [ENTER] to register the change made to the event search setting.

3-36
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

5. Press [F4] (DONE) to register the changes made to the measurement


conditions.

TIP
When changing the condition for two or more items, it is recommended to change
the condition for each item first and then press [F4].

Refer
Refer to the notes given on changing the measurement conditions (page 3-51).

3-37
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

Changing the Approximate Method

Before explaining how to change the setting, an explanation is given below regarding
approximate method.
When calculating splice loss or return loss, a straight line is assumed for calculation. This
straight line is called the approximate line. The following two methods are available to
assume the approximate line.

• Least squares approximate (hereafter called LSA)


• Two point approximate (hereafter called TPA)

LSA
An explanation of LSA is given below.
LSA calculates the loss between two points ( 1 - 2 ) using least squares approximate.
Features of LSA are given below.

Advantages
• Loss can be calculated with high accuracy since all the data present between the
two points are used.
• Variation of calculated loss caused by operators is reduced and repeatability of
calculated loss is improved.
Disadvantages
If excessive reflection or large step is present within the area between the specified two
points, calculation of loss will be performed with such reflection and step taken into
account, resulting in larger measurement error.

Use LSA when you want to check the loss within a section where no events are present as
shown below.
LSA enables calculation of loss with higher accuracy than TPA.

Approximate line for 1 - 2

1
2

Refer
For the method of displaying the approximate line, refer to page 7-3.

3-38
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

TPA
An explanation of TPA is given below.
TPA calculates the loss based on the level difference between the specified two points.
There is a possibility that variation of calculated loss caused by operators is reduced and
repeatability of calculated loss is changed considerably.
Use TPA when you want to check the loss for each event or the loss in the area where
events are present as shown below.

Approximate line for 1 - 2

Refer
For the method of displaying the approximate line, refer to page 7-3.

The approximate method can be changed as explained below.


♦ Example: “LSA” → “TPA”

1. Locate the cursor to “APPROX. METHOD” by using the rotary knob or the arrow
key.

3-39
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

2. Press [ENTER].
A selection window will appear.

TIP
Selectable *LSA
approximate methods TPA
*: Indicates the default setting.

3. Locate the cursor to “TPA” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

4. Press [ENTER] to register the change made to the approximate method.

5. Press [F4] (DONE) to register the changes made to the measurement


conditions.

TIP
When changing the condition for two or more items, it is recommended to change
the condition for each item first and then press [F4].

Refer
Refer to the notes given on changing the measurement conditions (page 3-51).

3-40
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

Changing the Back Scatter Level

The light traveling through an optical fiber causes phenomena called Rayleigh scattering.
Among these scattering rays, those which travel in the opposite direction of incident rays
are called back scattering rays.
The backscatter level set here will be used as a constant to calculate the return loss for
each event and the total return loss.
The backscatter level can be changed as explained below.
♦ Example: “−50.13dB” → “−52.00dB”

Caution •The calculated return loss for each event and the total return loss will not be
accurate unless the back scatter level set here is accurate.

•The back scatter level set for each wavelength is stored in the memory. So if the
wavelength is changed, the backscatter level set for each wavelength will be
displayed.

•Set the back scatter level at pulse width 1 µs.

1. Locate the cursor to “BACKSCATTER” by using the rotary knob or the arrow
key.

Caution When F3 [MULTI WL MEASURE] is selected “ON”, the cursor can not move on
backscatter.

3-41
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

2. Press [ENTER].
A selection window will appear.

TIP
Default setting

−10.00dB Wavelength 0.85µm: −32.00dB

Selectable to Wavelength 1.30µm: −41.00dB


back scatter level −64.99dB
Wavelength 1.31µm: −50.00dB
(0.01dB step)
Wavelength 1.55µm: −52.00dB

3. Locate the cursor to “0” by using [W] / [X].

4. Change to “2” by using the rotary knob or [S].

5. Locate the cursor to “1” by using [W] / [X].

6. Change to “0” by using the rotary knob or [T].

7. Locate the cursor to “3” by using [W] / [X].

8. Change to “0” by using the rotary knob or [T].

9. Press [ENTER] to register the change made to the backscatter level.

10. Press [F4] (DONE) to register the changes made to the measurement
conditions.

TIP
When changing the condition for two or more items, it is recommended to change
the condition for each item first and then press [F4].

Refer
Refer to the notes given on changing the measurement conditions (page 3-51).

3-42
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

Changing the Splice Loss Threshold

When auto search is executed, splice losses exceeding the threshold set here will be
detected as events.
The splice loss threshold can be changed as explained below.
♦ Example: “0.28dB” → “0.35dB”

Refer
For details on splice loss, refer to page 1-45.

1. Locate the cursor to “SPLICE LOSS” by using the rotary knob or the arrow key.

2. Press [ENTER].
A selection window will appear.

TIP

0.01dB
Selectable to
splice loss threshold 9.99dB
(0.01dB step)

Default setting: 0.03dB

3. Locate the cursor to “2” by using [W] / [X].

4. Change to “3” by using the rotary knob or [S].

3-43
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

5. Locate the cursor to “8” by using [W] / [X].

6. Change to “5” by using the rotary knob or [T].

7. Press [ENTER] to register the change made to the splice loss threshold.

8. Press [F4] (DONE) to register the changes made to the measurement


conditions.

TIP
When changing the condition for two or more items, it is recommended to change
the condition for each item first and then press [F4].

Refer
Refer to the notes given on changing the measurement conditions (page 3-51).

3-44
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

Changing the Return Loss Threshold

When auto search is executed, return losses exceeding the threshold set here will be
detected as events.
The return loss threshold can be changed as explained below.
♦ Example: “50dB” → “38dB”

Refer
For details on return loss, refer to page 1-45.

1. Locate the cursor to “RETURN LOSS” by using the rotary knob or the arrow
key.

2. Press [ENTER].
A selection window will appear.

TIP

20
Selectable to
return loss threshold 70
(1dB step)

Default setting: 50dB

3. Locate the cursor to “5” by using [W] / [X].

4. Change to “3” by using the rotary knob or [T].

5. Locate the cursor to “0” by using [W] / [X].

3-45
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

6. Change to “8” by using the rotary knob or [S].

7. Press [ENTER] to register the change made to the return loss threshold.

8. Press [F4] (DONE) to register the changes made to the measurement


conditions.

TIP
When changing the condition for two or more items, it is recommended to change
the condition for each item first and then press [F4].

Refer Refer to the notes given on changing the measurement conditions (page 3-51).

3-46
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

Changing the Fiber End Threshold

When auto search is executed, events exceeding the threshold set here will be detected
as the fiber end.
The fiber end threshold can be changed as explained below.
♦ Example: “3dB” → “10dB”

Refer
For details on the fiber end, refer to page 1-44.

1. Locate the cursor to “END OF FIBER” by using the rotary knob or the arrow
key.

2. Press [ENTER].
A selection window will appear.

TIP
3dB
4dB
5dB
Selectable 6dB
fiber end threshold 7dB
8dB
9dB
*10dB

*: Indicates the default setting.

3. Locate the cursor to “10dB” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

3-47
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

4. Press [ENTER] to register the change made to the fiber end threshold.

5. Press [F4] (DONE) to register the changes made to the measurement


conditions.

TIP
When changing the condition for two or more items, it is recommended to change
the condition for each item first and then press [F4].

Refer
Refer to the notes given on changing the measurement conditions (page 3-51).

Changing the Filter Setting

Refer
For the method of changing the filter setting, refer to page 3-59.

3-48
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

Changing the Plug Check Setting

The plug check function checks the connection condition between the instrument and
optical fiber to be measured.
When this function is enabled (ON), emission of laser from the instrument will be
prevented if the optical fiber is not connected or it is connected but not properly.
The plug check setting can be changed as explained below.
♦ Example: “OFF” → “ON”

1. Locate the cursor to “PLUG CHECK” by using the rotary knob or the arrow key.

2. Press [ENTER].
A selection window will appear.

TIP
Selectable *OFF Disables the plug check function.
plug check setting ON Enables the plug check function.

*: Indicates the default setting.

3. Locate the cursor to “ON” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

4. Press [ENTER] to register the change made to the plug check function setting.

5. Press [F4] (DONE) to register the changes made to the measurement


conditions.

TIP
When changing the condition for two or more items, it is recommended to change
the condition for each item first and then press [F4].

Refer
Refer to the notes given on changing the measurement conditions (page 3-51).

3-49
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

Caution
When the plug check is ON, the following message appears upon
measurement start if there is not a good connection between the unit
and the optical connector.

Changing the Average Continue Setting

Refer
For average measurement continue and the method of changing the average
continue setting, refer to page 3-62.

3-50
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

Notes on Changing of Measurement Conditions / Auto Search


Conditions

Caution If you try to close the measurement condition / auto search condition change
window without pressing [F4] (DONE)(*1), the following message will appear.

*1: Press [MODE] or [ESC].

3-51
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

TIP
To restore the previous condition setting, press [F2] (UNDO).

Undo can be performed up to five times.

Assuming that the wavelength, distance range and pulse width are changed in this
order as follows.

Wavelength :1.31μm → 1.55μm

Distance range:40km → 80km

Pulse width :20μs → 10μs

After the measurement conditions are changed as above, press [F2] (UNDO).

Press [F2] (UNDO): The pulse width will return to 20μs.

Press [F2] (UNDO): The distance range will return to 40km.

Press [F2] (UNDO): The wavelength will return to 1.31μm.

3-52
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

Restoring the Default Measurement Conditions / Auto Search


Conditions
This section explains how to restore the default measurement conditions / auto search
conditions.

1. Display the measurement condition setting window.

Refer
For the method of displaying the measurement condition setting window, refer to
page 3-10.

2. Press [F1] (INITIALIZE).


The following window will appear.

3. Press [F5] (YES) to restore the default measurement conditions / auto search
conditions.

3-53
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

3.6 Setting the File Name/Location to Store the File


[Step 5]
If the measured data auto saving function of the measurement condition has been
enabled, the acquired data is automatically saved when an average measurement is
completed. So it is necessary to set the file name and to select drive and folder to store
the data, prior to measurement.

Refer
•For the method to enable the measured data auto saving function, refer to page
3-34.

•For the method to set the file name, refer to page 3-97, page 3-104.

•For the method to set the location to store the data, refer to page 3-89.

3-54
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

3.7 Measuring an Optical Fiber [Step 6]


This section explains how to measure the optical fiber connected to the instrument and
display the measured data. This instrument allows use of the following two measurement
methods.

• Real time measurement


• Average measurement

Caution Use of devices, such as cellular phones, that generate a strong magnetic field near
the instrument during measurement may affect measured data. So, such devices
should not be used during measurement.

3-55
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

Performing Real Time Measurement


Real time measurement uses the default average time set to the instrument to perform
measurement and display the measured data. The average time set by the user will be
disabled.
Since measurement conditions can be changed during real time measurement, changes in
the trace occurring as a result of changes in the measurement conditions can be observed
in real time.

1. Press [REALTIME].
Real time measurement will start.

WARNING
Do not disconnect the optical fiber from the instrument during measurement.
Laser beams are invisible to the naked eye, but if they enter the eyes, they may cause
impaired eyesight.

TIP
•A message “LASER ON” is displayed during measurement.

•To stop real time measurement, press [REALTIME] again.

•Information such as comment and operator’s name can be added to the trace
during measurement.

Refer
For the method of entering information, refer to Chapter 4.

3-56
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

Performing Average Measurement


Average measurement obtains data for each pulse, calculates the mean of the data
obtained for all the pulses, and then displays it.
This method improves the signal to noise ratio (S/N), and is effective when you want to
detect weak signals overwhelmed by noise.
If “NORMAL” or “Hi-RETURN” has been set for “AVERAGE METHOD”, the attenuation
that has been set will be disabled since the instrument sets an appropriate attenuation
automatically and performs measurement.

Refer
For details on average method, refer to page 3-31.

1. Press [AVE].
Average measurement will start.

WARNING
Do not disconnect the optical fiber from the instrument during measurement.
Laser beams are invisible to the naked eye, but if they enter the eyes, they may cause
impaired eyesight.

3-57
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

TIP
•A message “LASER ON” is displayed during measurement.

•The following bar showing progress will appear during measurement.

•Average measurement will end automatically, and “100%” will be displayed when it
is completed successfully.

•If [AVE] is pressed during measurement, measurement will stop and the progress
of averaging performed so far will be displayed.

•Time required up to the end of measurement varies with measurement conditions


(distance range, average time).

•Information such as label and operator’s name can be added to the trace during
measurement.

•If the event search function has been set to AUTO, an event search is performed
when a measurement is successfully completed.

•If the measured data auto saving function has been set to ON, the measured data
is saved in a selected storage media when a measurement is successfully
completed.

Refer
•For the method of entering information, refer to Chapter 4.

•For the method to enable the event search function, refer to page 3-36.

•For the method to enable the automatic saving function, refer to page 3-34.

•For the method to select a storage media, refer to page 3-92.

3-58
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

When the Trace Contains a Lot of Noise


If the trace obtained by average measurement contains so much noise that the trace
cannot be observed clearly, remove noise as explained below.

• Use the filter function to eliminate noise.


• Use the average measurement continue function to eliminate noise.
• Increase the average time/interval and perform average measurement again.
• Increase the pulse width and perform average measurement again.
• Switch the average method to “DIVISION” and perform measurement again.

Using the Filter Function

The filter function setting can be changed as explained below.


♦ Example: “OFF” → “ON”

1. Display the measurement condition/auto search condition change window.

Refer
For the method of displaying the window, refer to page 3-10.

2. Locate the cursor to “FILTER” by using the rotary knob or the arrow key.

3-59
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

3. Press [ENTER].
A selection window will appear.

TIP
• The filter function can be used for measured traces or recalled traces.

• The filter has the following features.

The signal to noise ratio (S/N) is improved by processing the trace digitally.
However, this makes edges of the trace round, and therefore difficult to identify
Fresnel reflection occurring in adjacent areas.

Selectable *OFF Disables the filter function.


filter setting ON Enables the filter function.

*: Indicates the default setting.

4. Locate the cursor to “ON” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

5. Press [ENTER] to register the change made to the filter setting.

6. Press [F4] (DONE) to register the changes made to the measurement


conditions.

3-60
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

TIP
When “OFF” is selected

When “ON” is selected

Caution
The filter setting will be retained in the internal memory even if the instrument is
turned OFF. So, when the instrument is turned ON, the measurement conditions in
effect immediately before the instrument was turned OFF previously will be
restored.

Refer
Refer to the notes given on changing the measurement conditions (page 3-51).

3-61
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

Using the Average Measurement Continue Function

The average measurement continue function allows you to perform average measurement
on the obtained trace additionally.
For instance, if the data obtained by average measurement (2^16) contains a lot of noise,
enabling this function and starting average measurement will continue to perform average
measurement on that data up to 2^18 times. This results in shorter measurement time,
compared to that when increasing the average time and performing average measurement
from the beginning again.
The average measurement continue setting can be changed as explained below.
♦ Example: “OFF” → “ON”

Caution
•This function cannot be used for data obtained by “2^18”, “262k” or “30min”.

•This function cannot be changed if “AUTO RANGE” or “AUTO ATTENUATION”


has been selected for AUTO SET. And multi wavelength is set.

1. Display the measurement condition/auto search condition change window.

Refer
For the method of displaying the window, refer to page 3-10.

2. Locate the cursor to “AVE. CONTINUE” by using the rotary knob or the arrow
key.

3. Press [ENTER].
A selection window will appear.

TIP
Selectable average *OFF Disables the average measurement continue function.
measurement
continue setting ON Enables the average measurement continue function.

*: Indicates the default setting.

3-62
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

4. Locate the cursor to “ON” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

5. Press [ENTER] to register the change made to the average measurement


continue setting.

6. Press [F4] (DONE) to register the changes made to the measurement


conditions.

7. Press [AVE] to start measurement.

Caution
The average measurement continue setting will be retained in the internal memory
even if the instrument is turned OFF. So, when the instrument is turned ON, the
measurement conditions in effect immediately before the instrument was turned
OFF previously will be restored.

TIP
Averaging time or averaging interval is displayed, when measurement start.

Refer
Refer to the notes given on changing the measurement conditions (page 3-51).

Changing measurement conditions and average measurement again

Refer
•For the method of changing the measurement conditions, refer to page 3-12.

•For the method of performing average measurement, refer to page 3-57.

3-63
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

3.8 Checking the Measured Data [Step 7]


This section explains how to display and check the details of measured data.

Basic Operations
Moving the Cursor

The cursor can be moved as explained below.

1. Make sure the CURSOR Dist. field is displayed in the window.

2. Turn the rotary knob.


The cursor will move.
Clockwise: The cursor moves to the right.
Counter-clockwise: The cursor moves to the left.

Rotary knob

3-64
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

TIP
•The cursor can move between the measurement start and end points. However, at
the measurement start point, the cursor will not move any more even if the rotary
knob is rotated counter-clockwise. Similarly, it will not move even if the rotary knob
is rotated clockwise at the measurement end point.

Holding down the rotary knob will allow you to change the cursor speed.

•If a trace is currently displayed, the cursor will move along it.

3-65
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

Enlarging/Reducing the Trace in Size

The currently displayed trace can be enlarged or reduced in size as explained below.

1. Locate the cursor to that part of the trace you want to enlarge or reduce by
turning the rotary knob.

2. Press [SCALE] to highlight the vertical-axis scale (dB/Div)/horizontal-axis scale


(km/Div).

The following items will be highlighted alternately each time [SCALE] is pressed.

Vertical-axis scale (dB/Div)/horizontal-axis scale (km/Div)

Display start level (dB)/display start distance (km)

3. Use the arrow keys to enlarge/reduce the trace.


Press [S]: Reduces the trace along the vertical-axis (dB/Div).
Press [T]: Enlarges the trace along the vertical-axis (dB/Div).
Press [W]: Enlarges the trace along the horizontal-axis (km/Div).
Press [X]: Reduces the trace along the horizontal-axis (km/Div).

TIP
The trace will be enlarged/reduced around the cursor position.

3-66
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

Shifting the Trace

The currently displayed trace can be shifted as explained below.

1. Press [SCALE] to highlight the display start level (dB)/display start distance
(km).

The following items will be highlighted alternately each time [SCALE] is pressed.

Display start level (dB)/display start distance (km)

Vertical-axis scale (dB/Div)/horizontal-axis scale (km/Div)

2. Use the arrow keys to shift the trace.


Press [S]: Shifts the trace downward.
Press [T]: Shifts the trace upward.
Press [W]: Shifts the trace to the left.
Press [X]: Shifts the trace to the right.

Caution This trace shift function is effective only if the trace is currently enlarged.

3-67
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

TIP
• The trace is shifted by turned rotary knob to same direction continuously after
cursor is moved to the left end or the right end when the trace is enlarge.

•Holding down the rotary knob will allow you to change the sift speed
(COARSE/FINE).

3-68
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

When “AUTO” is Selected for “EVENT SEARCH”


When average measurement is completed successfully with “AUTO” currently selected for
“EVENT SEARCH”, events will be searched and displayed as shown below.

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

TIP
In the example of the above window, both trace and event list are displayed.

It is possible to display an event list only or a trace only.

Refer
For the method of displaying an event list only or a trace only, refer to pages 3-107
and 5-3.

3-69
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

No. Name Description


1 TOTAL RL TOTAL RL Displays the return loss occurring between S and E
points.
If R point has been set, the return loss occurring between R and E
points will be displayed.
2 TOTAL LOSS Displays the total loss occurring between S and E points.
If R point has been set, the total loss occurring between R and E
points will be displayed.
3 FAULT EVENT Displays the number of events (fault events) whose splice loss or
return loss exceeds the preset threshold.
4 EVENT No. Displays event Nos. in ascending order, starting from the one
nearest to the left edge of the fiber cable.
“*” is displayed in front of fault event Nos.
5 DISTANCE (km) Displays the distance from the origin to the event.
6 SPLICE LOSS(dB) Displays the splice loss for the event.
It will be displayed in red if it exceeds the threshold
7 RETURN LOSS(dB) Displays the return loss for the event. It will be displayed in red if it
exceeds the threshold.
8 Cum LOSS(dB) Displays the loss accumulated, starting from the first event up to the
one you are currently referring to.
9 dB/km Displays the loss (per km) between events.
10 EVENT TYPE : Indicates that the event is a negative loss.
: Indicates that the event is a positive loss.
: Indicates that the event is reflection.
11 SECTION Gr INDEX Displays the group index between events.

Refer
For the method of setting the threshold for fault events, refer to page 5-36 and
5-37.

3-70
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

Changing the Current Event

The current event is the event you are currently referring to.

1. The current event can be changed by turning the rotary knob.

TIP
Event 1 will be set as the current event just after auto search is completed.

But the R point will be set as current event, if distance reference will be set.

Refer
For details on the distance reference, refer to page 7-27.

3-71
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

When “MANUAL” is Selected for “EVENT SEARCH”


The following window will appear at the end of average measurement if “MANUAL” is
currently selected for “EVENT SEARCH”.

TIP
If [F3] is pressed in this window, auto search will be performed automatically and
the window shown on page 3-68 will appear.

Refer For the method of searching events, refer to page 3-36.

This section explains how to check the following items manually.

• Distance from the origin


• Distance between two points
• Splice loss
• Return loss

3-72
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

Checking the Distance from the Origin

This section explains how to check the distance from the distance origin.

I wonder if I could find the


distance from the origin.

1. Turn the rotary knob.


The distance from the origin to the cursor position will be displayed.

Cursor

Distance from the origin to the cursor

TIP
•Normally, the distance origin means the connection point between the instrument
and optical fiber.

•The position of the distance origin can be changed.

•The cursor type (shape) can be changed.

•To find more accurate distance, enlarge the trace and adjust the cursor position.

Refer •For the method of moving the cursor, refer to page 3-64.

•For the method of changing the distance origin, refer to page 7-27.

•For the method of changing the cursor type (shape), refer to page 2-8.

•For the method of enlarging the trace, refer to page 3-66.

3-73
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

Checking the Distance between Two Points

This section explains how to check the distance between the desired two points.

I wonder if I could find the distance


between two points.

How many kilometers?

3-74
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

1. Press [MODE] to locate the cursor to “MARKER” (“MARKER” is highlighted).

2. Turn the rotary knob and locate the cursor to the start point of the distance to
be found.

Refer
For the method of moving the cursor, refer to page 3-64.

3. Press [F1] ( 1 ).
Marker 1 will appear at the cursor position.

Distance from the origin to 1

4. Locate the cursor to the end point of the distance you want to know, by turning
the rotary knob.

3-75
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

5. Press [F2] ( 2 ).
“ 2 ” will appear at the cursor position.
The distance between the two points will be displayed.

Distance from the origin to 2

Distance between the two points

Inter-marker information
1

SPLICE LOSS : dB
RETURN LOSS :
1 - 2 2 - 3 [a] 2

[a] dB dB
[b] km km
[a] / [b] dB/km dB/km
[b]

3-76
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

Caution
The inter-marker values (dB and dB/km) vary considerably depending on the
currently selected approximate method.

TIP
To find more accurate distance, enlarge the trace and fine-adjust the markers.

Refer
•For details on approximate method, refer to page 3-38.

•For the method of enlarging the trace, refer to page 3-66.

To clear the markers

1. Press [F5] (NEXT PAGE) in this window.

2. Press [F3] (MARKER DELETE).

To clear the cursor

1. Press [F5] (NEXT PAGE) in this window.

2. Press [F4] (CURSOR DELETE).

3-77
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

Checking the Splice Loss

Splice loss can be checked using the following two methods.

• 4-point method
• 6-point method

An explanation is given above for each method.

Refer
For details on splice loss, refer to page 1-45.

I wonder if I could find the splice


loss for events.

3-78
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

4-Point Method
The 4-point method allows you to check splice loss for the desired events using four
markers.

1. Press [MODE] to locate the cursor to “MARKER” (“MARKER” is highlighted).

2. Locate the cursor near the desired event by turning the rotary knob.

Refer
For the method of moving the cursor, refer to page 3-64.

3. Enlarge the trace.

Refer
For the method of enlarging the trace, refer to page 3-66.

3-79
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

4. Locate the cursor on the desired event by turning the rotary knob.

Caution
Events (T) indicate the following positions.

T T
Positive splice loss Negative splice loss Reflection

5. Press [F2] ( 2 ).
“ 2 ” will appear at the cursor position.
Markers 1 , Y2 and 3 will be set when 2 marker is displayed.
The splice loss will be displayed.
Distance from the origin to each marker

Splice loss

3-80
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

Caution •If markers 1 , Y2, 3 , Y1 and Y3 are already set before 2 , markers 1 , Y2 and
3 will not be set automatically.

•Make sure that 2 is set at the exact position. The splice loss will vary
considerably depending on the position of marker 2 .

TIP
Markers 1 and 3 move closer to 2 each time [F2] is pressed. If [F2] is
pressed when they are located closest to 2 , they will return to the edges of the
window. This operation can be repeated as many times as you like, however, if
another operation is carried out in between, this operation can no longer be carried
out.

Inter-marker information

SPLICE LOSS : [a] dB


RETURN LOSS :
1 - 2 2 - 3

[b] dB [e] dB
[c] km [f] km
[b] / [c] dB/km [e] / [f] dB/km

1
Approximate line for Y2- 3

2
[b]

[a] Y2

3
[e]

[c] [f]

3-81
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

Caution
The inter-marker values (dB and dB/km) vary considerably depending on the
currently selected approximate method.

Refer
•For details on approximate method, refer to page 3-38.

•For the method of deleting markers and cursor, refer to page 3-77.

•For the method of displaying the approximate line, refer to page 7-3.

3-82
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

6-Point Method
The 6-point method allows you to check splice loss for the desired events using six
markers.
The distance from the previous event can be found by performing this method.
In this explanation, it is assumed that four markers ( 1 to 3 , Y2) have already been set.

Refer
For the method of setting four markers, refer to page 3-79.

1. Move 1 .
1-1. Locate the cursor to the event just before the current one by turning the
rotary knob.

Refer
For the position for marker 1 , refer to page 3-85.

1-2. Press [F1] ( 1 ).


The position of marker 1 will move.

3-83
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

2. Set marker Y1.


2-1. Locate the cursor to the position where Y1 is to be set, by turning the
rotary knob.

Refer
For the position for marker Y1, refer to page 3-85.

2-2. Press [F5] (NEXT PAGE).


2-3. Press [F1] (Y1).
“Y1” will appear at the cursor position.

3. Set marker Y3.


3-1. Locate the cursor to the position where Y3 is to be set, by turning the
rotary knob.

Refer
For the position for marker Y3, refer to page 3-85.

3-2. Press [F2] (Y3).


Marker Y3 will appear at the cursor position.
The splice loss will be displayed. Distance from the origin to each marker

Splice loss Inter-marker information

3-84
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

Inter-marker information

SPLICE LOSS : [a] dB


RETURN LOSS :
1 - 2 2 - 3

[b] dB [e] dB
[c] km [f] km
[b] / [c] dB/km [e] / [f] dB/km

Approximate line for Y1-Y3 Approximate line for Y2- 3

Y1

Y3 2
[b]

[a] Y2

3
[e]

[c] [f]

Caution
The inter-marker values (dB and dB/km) vary considerably depending on the
currently selected approximate method.

Refer
•For details on approximate method, refer to page 3-38.

•For the method of deleting markers and cursor, refer to page 3-77.

•For the method of displaying the approximate line, refer to page 7-3.

3-85
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

Checking the Return Loss

This section explains how to check the return loss for the desired event.

I wonder if I could know the return


loss for events.

3-86
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

1. Press [MODE] to locate the cursor to “MARKER” (“MARKER” is highlighted).

2. Locate the cursor near the desired event by turning the rotary knob.

Refer
For the method of moving the cursor, refer to page 3-64.

3. Enlarge the trace.

Refer
For the method of enlarging the trace, refer to page 3-66.

4. Locate the cursor to the event by turning the rotary knob.

5. Press [F1] ( 1 ).
Marker 1 will appear at the cursor position.

Distance from the origin to 1

3-87
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

6. Locate the cursor at the peak of the event by turning the rotary knob.

7. Press [F2] ( 2 ).
The return loss will be displayed.

Distance from the origin to 2

Return loss

Caution
“<” mark will appear in front of the return loss value if the trace is saturated.

The level of reflection occurring when the trace is saturated will be actually larger
than that displayed.

To prevent saturation, the following two methods are available.

•Measuring again with larger attenuation

•Measuring again with “Hi-RETURN” average method

•Measuring again with wider pulse width

Refer •For the method of changing the attenuation, refer to page 3-20.

•For the method of deleting markers and cursor, refer to page 3-77.

3-88
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

3.9 Recording the Measured Data [Step 8]


This section explains how to save and print the measured data.

Saving the Measured Data


This section explains how to save the measured data, by taking an example of the
following file name and location.
Save destination drive: PCMCIA
Save destination folder: 2004/Jun/16-30
File type: .SOR(Telcordia)
File name: 003aMeasurement1550nm

No Comment Wavelength

Caution If the measured data auto saving function has been set to ON, the measured data
is saved under the various conditions set in this section when an average
measurement is completed.

Refer For the method to enable the automatic saving function, refer to page 3-34.

3-89
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

Displaying the File Operation Window

1. Press [FILE].
The following file operation window will appear.

TIP
The file operation window can also be displayed by pressing [MODE] and locating
the cursor at the desired file.

3-90
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

Changing the File Operation Setting

This instrument allows various file operations (saving, recalling, deleting, printing,
copying).
This section explains how to change the file operation .
♦ Example: “COPY” → “SAVE”

1. Press [F1] (FILE OPERATION).


A selection window will appear.

TIP
*SAVE Saves the measured data.
RECALL Recalls a saved file.
Selectable
DELETE Deletes a saved file.
file operations
PRINT Recalls a saved file and prints its data.
COPY Copies a saved file to another drive or directory.

*: Indicates the default setting.

2. Locate the cursor to “SAVE” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

3. Press [ENTER] to register the change made to the file operation setting.

3-91
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

Switching the Drive to Another

This section explains how to switch the drive.


♦ Example: “INTERNAL MEMORY” → “PCMCIA”

Caution If no drives are installed on the instrument or if they are installed but not connected,
it is not possible to select them. In this case, the measured data will be saved to the
internal memory. The floppy disk drive cannot be selected unless a floppy disk is
inserted into the floppy disk drive.

1. Locate the cursor to “DRIVE” by using the arrow key.

TIP
The cursor is already located at “DRIVE” when the file operation window is
displayed.

2. Press [ENTER].
A selection window will appear.

TIP
EXTENSION UNIT
USB
Selectable drives
PCMCIA
*INTERNAL MEMORY
*: Indicates the default setting.

3. Locate the cursor to “PCMCIA” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

4. Press [ENTER] to register the change made to the drive setting.

3-92
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

Switching the Folder to Another

This section explains how to change the folder.


Assuming that the selected drive has the following folder structure.

Root 2003
2004 Apr 1-15
16-30
May 1-15
16-31
Jun 1-15
16-30
Jul 1-15
16-31
Aug 1-15
16-31

The method of changing from one folder to another is explained below.


♦ Example: “Root folder” → “2004” → “Jun” → “16-30”

Caution •Before specifying a folder, make sure that the folder is created using a personal
computer or by this instrument. It is not possible to specify a folder if it is not
created. In this case, the measured data will be saved to the root folder.

•In the case of the root folder on a storage media that has been initialized by FAT
16, up to 512 files (*1) can be stored.

*1:File names must consist of 8 characters (excluding file extension). “512” also
includes the number of folders.

Refer For the method of creating a folder by this instrument, refer to page 6-27.

1. Locate the cursor to “FOLDER” by using the arrow key.

3-93
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

2. Press [ENTER].
A selection window will appear.

TIP
The folder (e.g. root folder) selected in the selection window shows all the sub
folders. To display all the sub folders of a sub folder, locate the cursor to the sub
folder, and press [W] or [X]. To move the upper folder, locate cursor to “Above” and
press [W] or [X].

Locate the cursor to “2004” and then press [X].

Upper Lower
folder folder

Locate the cursor to “Above” and then press [X].

Display example

/ Above
2003 2004
2004 Apr
May
Jun
Jul
Aug

3. Locate the cursor to “2004” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

4. Press [W] or [X].

5. Locate the cursor to “Jun” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

6. Press [W] or [X].

7. Locate the cursor to “16-30” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

8. Press [ENTER] to register the change made to the folder setting.

3-94
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

Changing the File Type (Extension)

This section explains how to change the file type.


♦ Example: “.BMP(Image)” → “.SOR (Telcordia)”

1. Locate the cursor to “FILE TYPE” by using [S] / [T].

2. Press [ENTER].
A selection window will appear.

TIP

*.SOR (Telcordia) Saves the measured data in a format that conforms to


Telcordia SR-4731.
.TRD(AQ7260) Saves the measured data in AQ7260’s file format. Use
when loading AQ7260 data on the AQ7391 Emulation
software (ver. 2.8 or later).
.SET (Setup) Saves the measurement conditions.
.LST (Event List) Saves the event list in text format.
Selectable The measurement conditions and traces are not saved.
file types
.BMP (Image) Saves the screen displayed before [FILE] is pressed in
BITMAP format.
.TIF (Image) Saves the screen displayed before [FILE] is pressed in
TIFF format.
.SOR(Bellcore) Saves the measured data in a format that conforms to
Bellcore GR-196-CORE.
.CSV Saves the measured data in CSV format.

*: Indicates the default setting.

3-95
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

Caution • To recall a file saved using AQ7931 emulation software (Ver.2.8 or later), make
sure that the data is saved in .TRD or SOR (Bellcore) format. Also make sure
that the file name is a number with only three digits.

• The trace data of measured by 60k in data size or 640km in distance range
cannot be saved in TRD format.

• Even if data has been saved in SOR (Bellcore) format, it cannot be recalled using
AQ7931 emulation software (Ver.2.8) if its data size exceeds 20,000.

• Files created on the AQ7269 can be loaded on version 2.01 or later of the
AQ7932 emulation software.

TIP For the AQ7932 Emulation Software, contact the dealer from which you purchased
the instrument.

3. Locate the cursor to “.SOR(Telcordia)” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

4. Press [ENTER] to register the change made to the file type.

3-96
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

Changing the File Name Format

This section explains how to change the name type of a file.


♦ Example: “No.+COM” → ”No.+COM+No.”

Caution When file type is selected .SOR(Bellcore), File name type can not be changed.

1. Locate the cursor to “NAME TYPE” by using the arrow key.

2. Press [ENTER].
A selection window will appear.

TIP
No.+COM File name
@@@@@@@xxxx@@@@∗∗∗∗.$$$
COM+ No. ∗∗∗∗@@@@@@@xxxx@@@@.$$$
No. ∗∗∗∗.$$$
COM @@@@@@@xxxx@@@@.$$$
Selectable file
*No.+COM+WL ∗∗∗∗@@@@@@@xxxx@@@@&&&&nm.$$$
name formats
NO.+WL+COM ∗∗∗∗&&&&nm @@@@@@@xxxx@@@@.$$$
COM+No.+WL @@@@@@@xxxx@@@@∗∗∗∗&&&&nm.$$$
COM+WL+No. @@@@@@@xxxx@@@@&&&&nm∗∗∗∗.$$$
WL+No.+COM &&&&nm∗∗∗∗@@@@@@@xxxx@@@@.$$$
WL+COM+No. &&&&nm@@@@@@@xxxx@@@@∗∗∗∗.$$$

@: COMMENT, ∗: No., &: Wavelength, $: Extension

*: Indicates the default setting.

For the wavelength, the value used for measurement is displayed.

3-97
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

Refer
For details on No., refer to page 3-99.

3. Locate the cursor to “No.+COM+WL” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

TIP When using multi wavelength measurement function, please selects file name
included wavelength as file name type.

Refer For continuous measurement with multiple wavelengths, refer to page 7-52.

4. Press [ENTER] to register the change made to the file name format.

3-98
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

Changing the ID No.

The No. is used in combination with the SUB No. described in the next section.

Refer For the description on the increment of No., refer to page 3-101.

This section explains how to change the main No. attached to a file name.
♦ Example: “000” → “003”

Caution No. cannot be changed if “COM” has been selected as the file name format.

1. Locate the cursor to “ID No.” by using the arrow key.

2. Press [ENTER].
A selection window will appear.

TIP

* 000
Selectable to
ID No. 999
(1 step)

*: Indicates the default setting.

3-99
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

3. Locate the cursor to “0” (one’s digit) by using [W] / [X].

4. Change to “3” by using the rotary knob or [S].

5. Press [ENTER] to register the change made to the ID No.

3-100
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

Changing the Sub No.

This section explains how to change the Sub No. attached to a file name.
♦ Example: “NONE” → “a-c”

Caution When file type is selected .TRD(AQ7260) or .SOR(Bellcore), SUB No. can not be
changed.

1. Locate the cursor to “Sub No.” by using the arrow key.

2. Press [ENTER].
A selection window will appear.

TIP
*NONE
a-b
a-c
Selectable a-d

sub No. a-e


a-f
a-g

a-h

*: Indicates the default setting.

The label No. will increase as follows when “NONE” or “a-c” is selected.

NONE: 003→004→005→006→xxx

a-c : 003a→003b→003c→004a→004b→004c→xxx

(When the start No. is set to “003”)

3-101
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

3. Locate the cursor to “a-c” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

4. Press [ENTER] to register the change made to the sub No.

3-102
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

Changing the Save Color

This section explains how to change the save color.


♦ Example: “DISPLAY” → “B&W”

Caution The save color can be specified only if “.BMP(Image)” or “.TIF(Image)” is selected
as the file type.

1. Locate the cursor to “SAVE COLOR” by using the arrow key.

2. Press [ENTER].
A selection window will appear.

TIP
Selectable DISPLAY
save colors *B&W
*: Indicates the default setting.

3. Locate the cursor to “B&W” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

4. Press [ENTER] to register the change made to the save color.

3-103
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

Changing the File Name

This section explains how to change the comment part of the file name.

Caution
•The file name can consist of up to 43 characters in total.

Comment: 29 characters

No.: 4 characters

Wavelength: 6 characters

Extension: 4 characters

•The comment cannot be changed if “No.” has been selected as the file name
format.

1. Press [F2] (COMMENT CHANGE).


A window allowing you to change the comment will appear.

Refer
For method of input the character, refer to Chapter 4.

Saving the Data

1. Press [F4] (EXECUTE) to save the data.

Caution It is not allowed to use a space or a period (.) as the first character of a file name.

TIP
After the data has been saved, the trace mode will be activated.

3-104
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

Printing the Measured Data


The following three print functions are available.

• Printing the currently displayed window


• Printing the trace and event list
• Printing the event list

Caution Before starting to print, make sure that a printer is connected to the instrument and
correct print settings are made.

Refer
•For the method of connecting a printer, refer to pages 8-3 and 8-16.

•For the method of changing the printer, refer to pages 8-6 and 8-18.

•For the method of setting the print direction, refer to page 2-39.

•For the method of setting the print color, refer to page 2-41.

Printing the Currently Displayed Window

This section explains how to print the currently displayed window.

1. Press [PRINT].
Printing will start.

3-105
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

Printing the Trace and Event List

This section explains how to print both the measured trace and information on the events
detected by auto search.

Caution The trace and event list can be printed only if auto search has been performed.

1. Display a window showing the trace and event list.

Refer
For the method of displaying the trace+event list window, refer to page 3-69.

2. Press [F5] (TRACE+LIST PRINT).


Printing will start.

Printing the Event List

This section explains how to print only the information regarding the events detected by
auto search.

Caution The event list can be printed only if auto search has been performed.

1. Display a window showing the trace and event list.

Refe
For the method of displaying the trace+event list window, refer to page 3-69.

3-106
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

2. Press [F1] (SCREEN).


A selection window will appear.

TIP
*TRACE + LIST
Selectable screens LIST
TRACE
*: Indicates the default setting.

3. Locate the cursor to “LIST” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

4. Press [ENTER] to register the change made to the print object setting.

Measure date

5. Press [F5] (LIST PRINT).


Printing will start.

3-107
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

3.10 Turning OFF the Power [Step 9]


Turning OFF the Power
This section explains how to turn OFF the power to the instrument.

1. Make sure there is no measurement currently in progress.

TIP
A message “LASER ON” is displayed during measurement.

Refer
For the display in the laser ON , refer to page 3-56.

CAUTION
Before turning OFF the power, make sure that no measurement is in progress.
Turning OFF the power while measurement is in progress may damage the optical module.

WARNING
Before turning OFF the power, make sure that measurement is stopped.
Laser beams are emitted during measurement.
Never stare into the laser. Laser beams are invisible to the naked eye, but if they enter the
eyes, they may cause impaired eyesight.

2. Press the power switch located on the top of the instrument to turn OFF the
power.

TIP
The POWER LED will go out when the power to the instrument is OFF.

3. If you are operating the instrument by AC power, remove the AC adapter from
the instrument. Also disconnect the power plug from the AC power outlet.

3-108
Chapter 3 PERFORMING MEASUREMENTS

Disconnecting the Optical Fiber

1. Disconnect the optical fiber that has been measured from the instrument.

CAUTION
When disconnecting the optical connector, position the connector perpendicular to the
optical adapter and remove it gently. Shaking it sideways or removing by force may not
only damage the optical adapter, but also damage the ferrule on the optical connector.

2. Close the connector cover.

3-109
Chapter 4
ENTERING CHARACTERS

4.1 Entering Characters ................................................................................................. 4-2


4.2 Editing Characters.................................................................................................... 4-7
Chapter 4 ENTERING CHARACTERS

4.1 Entering Characters


With this instrument, a comment (label) on traces can be entered. In addition to the
comment, detailed information, such as the names of the company and personal who
measured the optical fiber, and the file name to be used to save the measured data can
be entered.
This section gives an example of entering a label in order to explain how to enter
characters.
Labels can be entered by the following methods.

• Entering a new label


• Using a label that has already been entered. [Fixed form input]

This section explains how to enter a new label.

Refer
• For how to enter a file name, refer to page 3-104.

• For details on the fixed form input method, refer to page 7-11.

• For how to enter detailed information, refer to page 7-16.

4-2
Chapter 4 ENTERING CHARACTERS

Displaying the Label Input Window

1. Press [MODE] and locate the cursor to “TRACE”.

2. Press [F2] (LABEL).


A window allowing you to enter a label will appear.

4-3
Chapter 4 ENTERING CHARACTERS

Entering a Label
This section explains how to enter the following characters.
♦ Example: AQ7260 OTDR

Caution The label can consist of up to 36 characters.

TIP
A label can be entered even when measurement is in progress.

1. Locate the character cursor to “A” by using the arrow key.

2. Press [ENTER].
“A” will be displayed in the [LABEL] field.

3. Locate the character cursor to “Q” by using the arrow key.

4. Press [ENTER].

5. Locate the character cursor to “7” by using the arrow key.

6. Press [ENTER].

7. Locate the character cursor to “2” by using the arrow key.

8. Press [ENTER].

9. Locate the character cursor to “6” by using the arrow key.

4-4
Chapter 4 ENTERING CHARACTERS

10. Press [ENTER].

11. Locate the character cursor to “0” by using the arrow key.

12. Press [ENTER].

13. Locate the character cursor to “space” by using the arrow key.

TIP
A space is provided for each line.

14. Press [ENTER].

15. Locate the character cursor to “O” by using the arrow key.

16. Press [ENTER].

17. Locate the character cursor to “T” by using the arrow key.

18. Press [ENTER].

19. Locate the character cursor to “D” by using the arrow key.

20. Press [ENTER].

21. Locate the character cursor to “R” by using the arrow key.

4-5
Chapter 4 ENTERING CHARACTERS

22. Press [ENTER].

TIP
“AQ7260 OTDR” is displayed in the [LABEL] field at the end of step 22.

23. Check whether “AQ7260 OTDR” is displayed in the [LABEL] field.

Refer
For the method of editing the entered characters, refer to page4-7.

24. Press [F5] (DONE) to register the label.


The entered character string will be displayed in the [LABEL] field.

4-6
Chapter 4 ENTERING CHARACTERS

4.2 Editing Characters


Deleting a Character
This section explains how to delete a character by taking an example in which an
superfluous character is entered by mistake into the label.

Current label
"AQ72560 OTDR"

Extra character

Label to be entered
"AQ7260 OTDR"

1. Display the label input window.

Refer
For the method of displaying the label input window, refer to page 4-3.

2. Push the rotary knob to switch the input mode to “INSERT”.

3. Locate the blink cursor after the character “5” to be deleted by turning the
rotary knob.

TIP
If the current input mode is “OVERWRITE”, locate the blinking cursor on “5”.

4. Press [F2] (BACK SPACE) to delete the unwanted character (“5”).

5. Press [F5] (DONE) to register the label.

4-7
Chapter 4 ENTERING CHARACTERS

Changing a Character
This section explains how to change a character by taking an example in which a wrong
character is entered by mistake into the label.

Current label
"AQ7250 OTDR"

Wrong character

Label to be entered
"AQ7260 OTDR"

1. Display the label input window.

Refer
For the method of displaying the label input window, refer to page 4-3.

2. Push the rotary knob to switch the input mode to “OVERWRITE”.

3. Locate the blink cursor to the character “5” to be changed by turning the rotary
knob.

4. Locate the cursor to “6” by using the arrow key.

5. Press [ENTER].

6. Press [F5] (DONE) to register the label.

4-8
Chapter 4 ENTERING CHARACTERS

Adding a Character
This section explains how to add a character by taking an example in which a character is
omitted by mistake from the label.

Current label
"AQ7260 ODR"

"T" is missing.

Label to be entered
"AQ7260 OTDR"

Caution
If the allowed maximum number of characters has already been entered or will be
exceeded by adding new characters, it will not be possible to add them.

1. Display the label input window.

Refer
For the method of displaying the label input window, refer to page 4-3.

2. Push the rotary knob to switch the input mode to “INSERT”.

3. Locate the blink cursor after the character “O” by using the rotary knob.

4. Locate the cursor to “T” by using the arrow key.

4-9
Chapter 4 ENTERING CHARACTERS

5. Press [ENTER].

Caution • The character you want to add will be added next to the blinking cursor.

• When adding the character, make sure that the input mode is set to “INSERT”.
If “OVERWRITE” is selected, the character at the blinking cursor will be
overwritten by the one you enter.

6. Press [F5] (DONE) to register the label.

4-10
Chapter 5
EDITING AUTOMATIC SEARCH
RESULTS

5.1 Editing an Event ....................................................................................................... 5-2


5.2 Editing an Event Marker ......................................................................................... 5-12
5.3 Editing the Event List.............................................................................................. 5-15
5.4 Attaching a Comment to an Event.......................................................................... 5-23
5.5 Changing the Conditions and Performing Auto Search Again ................................ 5-25
Chapter 5 EDITING AUTOMATIC SEARCH RESULTS

5.1 Editing an Event


When measurement of an optical fiber starts and auto search is performed, detection of
events will be performed by the instrument. In some cases, the instrument cannot detect
events since the back scatter level at reflection points is excessively low or it detects noise
as an event.
This section explains the following event edit functions.

• Inserting an event
• Deleting an event
• Moving an event

5-2
Chapter 5 EDITING AUTOMATIC SEARCH RESULTS

Inserting an Event

This section explains how to insert an event.

1. Measure the optical fiber and perform auto search.

Refer
•For the method of measuring an optical fiber, refer to page 3-57.

•For the screen that shows auto search results at the end of measurement, refer to
page 3-69.

2. Press [F1] (SCREEN).


A selection window will appear.

TIP
*TRACE + LIST
Selectable screens LIST
TRACE
*: Indicates the default setting.

3. Locate the cursor to “TRACE” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

5-3
Chapter 5 EDITING AUTOMATIC SEARCH RESULTS

4. Press [ENTER].
The following screen will appear.

Information regarding An event is to be inserted here.


the current event is
displayed.

5. Press [F2] (EVENT EDIT).

6. Locate the cursor to the point where an event is to be inserted by turning the
rotary knob.
If necessary, enlarge the trace.

Refer
•For the method of moving the cursor, refer to page 3-64.

•For the method of enlarging the trace, refer to page 3-66.

5-4
Chapter 5 EDITING AUTOMATIC SEARCH RESULTS

7. Press [F1] (EVENT INSERT).


The event is inserted.

Caution
One trace can be set up to 100 events.

TIP
•When an event is inserted between event Nos. 2 and 3, the inserted event will be
set as event 3 and a new No. will be assigned to each subsequent event.

•If an event is inserted to the left of the S event, the inserted event will be set as
the S event and a new No. will be assigned to each subsequent event.

•If an event is inserted to the right of the E event, the inserted event will be set as
the E event and a number event will be set at the point of the original E event

5-5
Chapter 5 EDITING AUTOMATIC SEARCH RESULTS

Deleting an Event
This section explains how to delete an event.
♦ Example: Deleting event 5

Caution This function is not possible if only S and E events exist.

1. Measure the optical fiber and perform auto search.

Refer •For the method of measuring an optical fiber, refer to page 3-57.

•For the screen that shows auto search results at the end of measurement, refer to
page 3-69.

2. Press [F1] (SCREEN).


A selection window will appear.

TIP
*TRACE + LIST
Selectable screens LIST
TRACE
*: Indicates the default setting.

3. Locate the cursor to “TRACE” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

5-6
Chapter 5 EDITING AUTOMATIC SEARCH RESULTS

4. Press [ENTER].
The following screen will appear.

An event is to be deleted here.


Information regarding
the current event is
displayed

5. Press [F2] (EVENT EDIT).

6. Press [F4] (NEXT EVENT) or [F5] (PREVIOUS EVENT) to set event 5 as the
current event.

5-7
Chapter 5 EDITING AUTOMATIC SEARCH RESULTS

7. Press [F2] (EVENT DELETE).


The event is deleted.

TIP
•A new No. will be assigned to each event located after the deleted event.

•If the S event is deleted, event 1 will be set as the S event, and a new event No.
will be assigned to each subsequent event.

•If the E event is deleted, the event with the largest event No. will be set as the E
event.

5-8
Chapter 5 EDITING AUTOMATIC SEARCH RESULTS

Moving an Event
This section explains how to move an event.
♦ Example: Moving event 3

1. Measure the optical fiber and perform auto search.

Refer
•For the method of measuring an optical fiber, refer to page 3-57.

•For the screen that shows auto search results at the end of measurement, refer to
page 3-69.

2. Press [F1] (SCREEN).


A selection window will appear.

TIP
*TRACE + LIST
Selectable screens LIST
TRACE
*: Indicates the default setting.

3. Locate the cursor to “TRACE” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

5-9
Chapter 5 EDITING AUTOMATIC SEARCH RESULTS

4. Press [ENTER].
The following screen will appear.

An event is to be moved here.

Information regarding
the current event is
displayed.

5. Press [F2] (EVENT EDIT).

6. Press [F4] (NEXT EVENT) or [F5] (PREVIOUS EVENT) to set event No.3 as the
current event.

7. Press [F3] (EVENT MARKER EDIT).

5-10
Chapter 5 EDITING AUTOMATIC SEARCH RESULTS

8. Locate the cursor to the point to which the current event is to be moved by
turning the rotary knob.
If necessary, enlarge the trace.

Refer
For the method of moving the cursor, refer to page 3-64.

9. Press [F2] ( 2 )
The event moves.

Caution The event can be moved between 1 and Y2.

5-11
Chapter 5 EDITING AUTOMATIC SEARCH RESULTS

5.2 Editing an Event Marker


When auto search is performed, events will be searched by the instrument. An event
marker ( 1 , 2 , Y2, 3 ) is added to each detected event to calculate splice loss etc.
The splice loss and dB/km vary slightly depending on the event marker positions.
This section explains how to change the marker position assigned to an event.
♦ Example: Changing the position of event marker 1 assigned to event 3

Refer
For details on splice loss, refer to pages 1-45 and 3-78.

1. Measure the optical fiber and perform auto search.

Refer •For the method of measuring an optical fiber, refer to page 3-57.

•For the screen that shows auto search results at the end of measurement, refer to
page 3-69.

2. Press [F1] (SCREEN).


A selection window will appear.

TIP
*TRACE + LIST
Selectable screens LIST
TRACE
*: Indicates the default setting.

3. Locate the cursor to “TRACE” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

5-12
Chapter 5 EDITING AUTOMATIC SEARCH RESULTS

4. Press [ENTER].

5. Press [F2] (EVENT EDIT).

6. Press [F4] (NEXT EVENT) or [F5] (PREVIOUS EVENT) to set event No.3 as the
current event.

7. Press [F3].

8. Locate the cursor to the point to which marker 1 is to be moved by turning the
rotary knob.
If necessary, enlarge the trace.

Refer
•For the method of moving the cursor, refer to page 3-64.

•For the method of enlarging the trace, refer to page 3-66.

5-13
Chapter 5 EDITING AUTOMATIC SEARCH RESULTS

9. Press [F1] ( 1 ).
The marker 1 moves.

TIP
•When a marker is moved, the information regarding events will be searched
re-calculated.

•The other marker positions can also be changed in the same way.

5-14
Chapter 5 EDITING AUTOMATIC SEARCH RESULTS

5.3 Editing the Event List


Distance calculation is performed using the group index set in the measurement
conditions. However, if two or more optical fibers are connected as a result of installation
of new transmission system, the group index varies with the optical fibers. In this case,
distance calculation can be performed with higher accuracy by setting the group index of
each optical fiber. To obtain accurate analysis results, it is necessary to edit the value
between certain points.
This section explains the following event list edit functions.

• Editing an interval distance


• Editing a return loss
• Editing an interval group index

5-15
Chapter 5 EDITING AUTOMATIC SEARCH RESULTS

Displaying the List Edit Window


This section explains how to display the window by which the event list can be changed.

1. Measure the optical fiber and perform auto search.

Refer
•For the method of measuring an optical fiber and performing auto search, refer to
page 3-57.

•For the screen that shows auto search results at the end of measurement, refer to
page 3-69.

2. Press [F1] (SCREEN).


A selection window will appear.

TIP
*TRACE + LIST
Selectable screens LIST
TRACE
*: Indicates the default setting.

3. Locate the cursor to “LIST” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

4. Press [ENTER].
A new screen will appear.

Refer
For the new window, refer to page 3-107.

5-16
Chapter 5 EDITING AUTOMATIC SEARCH RESULTS

5. Press [F3] (LIST EDIT).


The following window will appear.

5-17
Chapter 5 EDITING AUTOMATIC SEARCH RESULTS

Editing the Event List


Editing an Interval Distance

With this instrument, the distance is calculated using the group index. However, in some
cases, the distance between two points on the optical fiber is already known. In this case,
the interval group index can be calculated by changing the distance.
The method of changing the interval distance is given below.

1. Locate the cursor to the distance to be changed by using the rotary knob or the
arrow key.

2. Press [ENTER].
A selection window will appear.

3. Change the value by using the rotary knob or the arrow key.

4. Press [ENTER], and the value is fixed.

TIP
When the distance is changed, the interval group index for the changed events and
the distances for the subsequent events will be re-calculated.

5-18
Chapter 5 EDITING AUTOMATIC SEARCH RESULTS

Editing a Return Loss

With this instrument, the return loss is normally calculated based on the back scatter level.
However, in some cases, the return loss is already known. In this case, enter the return
loss to calculate the back scatter level.

1. Locate the cursor to the return loss to be changed by using the rotary knob or
the arrow key.

2. Press [ENTER].
A selection window will appear.

5-19
Chapter 5 EDITING AUTOMATIC SEARCH RESULTS

3. Change the value by using the rotary knob or the arrow key.

4. Press [ENTER], and the value is fixed.

TIP
When the return loss is changed, the back scatter level will be re-calculated.

The return loss for all the events is then re-calculated based on the newly
calculated back scatter level.

5-20
Chapter 5 EDITING AUTOMATIC SEARCH RESULTS

Editing an Section Group Index

If two or more optical fibers are connected as a result of installation of new transmission
system, the group index varies with the optical fibers. In this case, calculation of interval
distance can be performed with higher accuracy by setting the group index of each optical
fiber.

1. Locate the cursor to the interval group index to be changed by using the rotary
knob or the arrow key.

2. Press [ENTER].
A selection window will appear.

5-21
Chapter 5 EDITING AUTOMATIC SEARCH RESULTS

3. Change the value by using the rotary knob or the arrow key.

4. Press [ENTER], and the value is fixed.

TIP
•When the interval group index is changed, the distance for the changed event will
be re-calculated.

•It is also possible not to display the interval group index. The method is given
below.

1. With this screen displayed, press [F1] (SECTION Gr INDEX).

2. Locate the cursor to “NonDISPLAY”.

3. Press [ENTER].

5-22
Chapter 5 EDITING AUTOMATIC SEARCH RESULTS

5.4 Attaching a Comment to an Event


This instrument allows you to attach a comment (event note) to each event detected by
auto search.
This method of attaching a comment to an event is explained below.
♦ Example: Attaching a comment to event 1

Caution A comment can consist of up to 36 characters.

1. Measure the optical fiber and perform auto search.

Refer •For the method of measuring an optical fiber and performing auto search, refer to
page 3-57.

•For the screen that shows auto search results at the end of measurement, refer to
page 3-69.

2. Press [F1] (SCREEN).


A selection window will appear.

TIP
*TRACE + LIST
Selectable screens LIST
TRACE
*: Indicates the default setting.

3. Locate the cursor to “LIST” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

5-23
Chapter 5 EDITING AUTOMATIC SEARCH RESULTS

4. Press [ENTER].
A new screen will appear.

Refer
For the new screen, refer to page 3-107.

5. Locate the cursor to “No.1 Event” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

6. Press [F4] (EVENT NOTE EDIT).


The comment input window will appear, so enter the desired comment.

Refer
For the comment input window and the method of entering a comment, refer to
Chapter 4.

7. After the comment is input, press [F5] (DONE).


The entered comment will appear below the information for event 1.

TIP

Caution
The event note will be cleared when the power is turned OFF or when the next
measurement is started.

5-24
Chapter 5 EDITING AUTOMATIC SEARCH RESULTS

5.5 Changing the Conditions and Performing Auto


Search Again
It is possible to change search conditions for the data obtained by auto search, and
perform auto search with the new conditions.
The method of changing the following search conditions is explained below.

• Group index
• Approximate method
• Back scatter level
• Splice loss threshold
• Return loss threshold
• Fiber end threshold
• Fault event show/hide setting
• Splice loss threshold for fault events
• Return loss threshold for fault events

5-25
Chapter 5 EDITING AUTOMATIC SEARCH RESULTS

Displaying the Auto Search Condition Change Window


This section explains how to display the window by which the auto search conditions can
be changed.

1. Measure the optical fiber and perform auto search.

Refer
•For the method of measuring an optical fiber and performing auto search, refer to
page 3-57.

•For the screen that shows auto search results at the end of measurement, refer to
page 3-69.

2. Press [F1] (SCREEN).


A selection window will appear.

TIP
*TRACE + LIST
Selectable screens LIST
TRACE
*: Indicates the default setting.

3. Locate the cursor to “LIST” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

4. Press [ENTER].

Refer
For the new screen, refer to page 3-107.

5-26
Chapter 5 EDITING AUTOMATIC SEARCH RESULTS

5. Press [F2] (SEARCH CONDITION CHANGE).


The auto search condition change window will appear as shown below.

5-27
Chapter 5 EDITING AUTOMATIC SEARCH RESULTS

Changing the Auto Search Conditions


Changing the Group Index

Refer
For details on group index, refer to page 3-26.

1. Locate the cursor to “GROUP INDEX” by using the rotary knob or the arrow key.

2. Press [ENTER].
A selection window will appear.

3. Change to the desired group index.

Refer
For the method of changing the group index, refer to page 3-26.

4. Press [F1] (Re-SEARCH START).


Auto search will start with the newly set search conditions.

TIP
When changing the condition for two or more items, it is recommended to change
the condition for each item first and then press [F1].

Refer
Refer to the notes given on changing the search conditions (page 5-38).

5-28
Chapter 5 EDITING AUTOMATIC SEARCH RESULTS

Changing the Approximate Method

Refer For details on approximate method, refer to page 3-38.

1. Locate the cursor to “APPROX. METHOD” by using the rotary knob or the arrow
key.

2. Press [ENTER].
A selection window will appear.

3. Change to the desired approximate method.

Refer
For the method of changing the approximate method, refer to page 3-38.

4. Press [F1] (Re-SEARCH START).


Auto search will start with the newly set search conditions.

TIP
When changing the condition for two or more items, it is recommended to change
the condition for each item first and then press [F1].

Refer
Refer to the notes given on changing the search conditions (page 5-38).

5-29
Chapter 5 EDITING AUTOMATIC SEARCH RESULTS

Changing the Back Scatter Level

Refer
For details on back scatter level, refer to page 3-41.

1. Locate the cursor to “BACKSCATTER” by using the rotary knob or the arrow
key.

2. Press [ENTER].
A selection window will appear.

3. Change to the desired back scatter level.

Refer
For the method of changing the back scatter level, refer to page 3-41.

4. Press [F1] (Re-SEARCH START).


Auto search will start with the newly set search conditions.

TIP When changing the condition for two or more items, it is recommended to change
the condition for each item first and then press [F1].

Refer
Refer to the notes given on changing the search conditions (page 5-38).

5-30
Chapter 5 EDITING AUTOMATIC SEARCH RESULTS

Changing the Splice Loss Threshold

Refer
For details on splice loss threshold, refer to page 3-43.

1. Locate the cursor to “SPLICE LOSS” by using the rotary knob or the arrow key.

2. Press [ENTER].
A selection window will appear.

3. Change to the desired splice loss threshold.

Refer
For method of changing the splice loss threshold, refer to page 3-43.

4. Press [F1] (Re-SEARCH START).


Auto search will start with the newly set search conditions.

TIP
When changing the condition for two or more items, it is recommended to change
the condition for each item first and then press [F1].

Refer
Refer to the notes given on changing the search conditions (page 5-38).

5-31
Chapter 5 EDITING AUTOMATIC SEARCH RESULTS

Changing the Return Loss Threshold

Refer
For details on return loss threshold, refer to page 3-45.

1. Locate the cursor to “RETURN LOSS” by using the rotary knob or the arrow
key.

2. Press [ENTER].
A selection window will appear.

3. Change to the desired return loss threshold.

Refer
For method of changing the return loss threshold, refer to page 3-45.

4. Press [F1] (Re-SEARCH START).


Auto search will start with the newly set search conditions.

TIP
When changing the condition for two or more items, it is recommended to change
the condition for each item first and then press [F1].

Refer
Refer to the notes given on changing the search conditions (page 5-38).

5-32
Chapter 5 EDITING AUTOMATIC SEARCH RESULTS

Changing the Fiber End Threshold

Refer
For details on fiber end threshold, refer to page 3-47.

1. Locate the cursor to “END OF FIBER” by using the rotary knob or the arrow
key.

2. Press [ENTER].
A selection window will appear.

3. Change to the desired fiber end threshold.

Refer
For the method of changing the fiber end threshold, refer to page 3-47.

4. Press [F1] (Re-SEARCH START).


Auto search will start with the newly set search conditions.

TIP
When changing the condition for two or more items, it is recommended to change
the condition for each item first and then press [F1].

Refer
Refer to the notes given on changing the search conditions (page 5-38).

5-33
Chapter 5 EDITING AUTOMATIC SEARCH RESULTS

Changing the Fault Event Show/Hide Setting

The fault event show/hide setting can be changed as explained below.


♦ Example: “DISPLAY” → “NonDISPLAY”

Refer For details on fault event, refer to page 3-69.

1. Locate the cursor to “FAULT EVENT” by using the rotary knob or the arrow key.

2. Press [ENTER].
A selection window will appear.

TIP
*DISPLAY Performs auto search and displays noticeably the fault
Selectable fault events if any.
event settings NonDISPLAY Performs auto search, and handles fault events as normal
events and displays them.
*: Indicates the default setting.

Refer
For the method of displaying fault events, refer to page 3-69.

3. Locate the cursor to “NonDISPLAY” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

4. Press [ENTER] to register the change made to the fault event show/hide setting.

5-34
Chapter 5 EDITING AUTOMATIC SEARCH RESULTS

5. Press [F1] (Re-SEARCH START).

TIP
When “DISPLAY” is selected

When “NonDISPLAY” is selected

TIP
When changing the condition for two or more items, it is recommended to change
the condition for each item first and then press [F1].

Refer
Refer to the notes given on changing the search conditions (page 5-38).

5-35
Chapter 5 EDITING AUTOMATIC SEARCH RESULTS

Changing the Splice Loss Threshold for Fault Events

Caution
The splice loss threshold for fault events cannot be changed if “NonDISPLAY” is
selected for “FAULT EVENT”.

1. Locate the cursor to “SPLICE LOSS” for “AUTOSEARCH THRESHOLD VALUE”


by using the rotary knob or the arrow key.

2. Press [ENTER].
A selection window will appear.

3. Change to the desired splice loss threshold.

Refer
For method of changing the splice loss threshold, refer to page 3-43.

4. Press [F1] (Re-SEARCH START).


Auto search will start with the newly set search conditions.

TIP
When changing the condition for two or more items, it is recommended to change
the condition for each item first and then press [F1].

Refer
Refer to the notes given on changing the search conditions (page 5-38).

5-36
Chapter 5 EDITING AUTOMATIC SEARCH RESULTS

Changing the Return Loss Threshold for Fault Events

Caution The return loss threshold for fault events cannot be changed if “NonDISPLAY” is
selected for “FAULT EVENT”.

1. Locate the cursor to “RETURN LOSS” for “AUTOSEARCH THRESHOLD


VALUE” by using the rotary knob or the arrow key.

2. Press [ENTER].
A selection window will appear.

3. Change to the desired return loss threshold.

Refer
For method of changing the return loss threshold, refer to page 3-45.

4. Press [F1] (Re-SEARCH START).


Auto search will start with the newly set search conditions.

TIP
When changing the condition for two or more items, it is recommended to change
the condition for each item first and then press [F1].

Refer
Refer to the notes given on changing the search conditions (page 5-38).

5-37
Chapter 5 EDITING AUTOMATIC SEARCH RESULTS

Notes on Changing of Auto Search Conditions

Caution If the auto search conditions are changed using this window, they will be used as
the measurement conditions and auto search conditions to obtain data next time.

If you are not going to use the conditions set by this window to obtain new data, the
measurement conditions and auto search conditions must be changed.

Refer For the method of setting the conditions to be applied when obtaining new data,
refer to page 3-9.

5-38
Chapter 6
FILE OPERATION

6.1 File Operation........................................................................................................... 6-2


6.2 Using the Utility Functions ...................................................................................... 6-22
Chapter 6 FILE OPERATION

6.1 File Operation


This section explains the following file operation functions.

• Saving a file
• Recalling a file
• Deleting a file
• Printing a file
• Copying a file

Saving a File

Refer For the method of saving a file, refer to page 3-89.

6-2
Chapter 6 FILE OPERATION

Recalling a File
This section explains how to recall a file.

Displaying the File Operation Window

1. Press [FILE] to display the file operation window.

Refer For details on the file operation window, refer to page 3-90.

2. Press [F1] (FILE OPERATION).


A selection window will appear.

TIP

*SAVE
RECALL
Selectable file
DELETE
operations
PRINT
COPY

*: Indicates the default setting.

3. Locate the cursor to “RECALL” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

6-3
Chapter 6 FILE OPERATION

4. Press [ENTER] to change file operation.


The following window will appear.

Selecting a Drive

Caution If no drives are installed on the instrument or if they are installed but not connected,
it is not possible to select them. In this case, only files that are stored in the internal
memory can be recalled. In the case of the floppy disk drive, this function is not
possible unless a floppy disk is inserted into the floppy disk drive.

5. Select the drive.

Refer
For the method of changing the drive, refer to page 3-92.

6-4
Chapter 6 FILE OPERATION

Selecting a Folder

6. Select the desired folder.

Refer
For the method of selecting a folder, refer to page 3-93.

Selecting a File Type (Extension)

7. Select the file type of the file to be recalled.

Refer
For the method of selecting a file type, refer to page 3-95.

TIP
.SOR Displays a list of files saved in the file type that conforms to
Bellcore GR-196-CORE and Telcordia SR-4731.
TRD (AQ7260) Displays a list of files that have been saved by AQ7260.
.SET (Setup) Displays a list of files containing only the measurement
Selectable conditions.
file types
.LST (Event List) Displays a list of files containing an event list.
.TRB (AQ7250) Displays a list of files that have been saved by AQ7250.
.TRA (AQ7210/20) Displays a list of files that have been saved by AQ7210/20.
.4 (AQ-7140C/D) Displays a list of files that have been saved by AQ-7140C/D.

6-5
Chapter 6 FILE OPERATION

Selecting the File to be Recalled

8. Locate the cursor to the file to be recalled by turning the rotary knob.

9. Press [F2] (FILE SELECT) to select the file.

TIP
The color of the selected file name will change. “*” also appears in front of the file
name.

Up to four files (traces) can be selected.

•If a file(s) that you do not want to recall is selected by mistake, repeat steps 8 and
9. This will cancel selection of that file(s).

•By pressing [SCALE], the file list display format can be changed. However, if “FILE
NAME + LABEL” is selected, it will take some time before the file list is displayed.

FILE NAME + LABEL

Recalling the Selected File(s)

10. Press [F4] (EXECUTE) to recall the selected file(s).

6-6
Chapter 6 FILE OPERATION

Deleting a File
This section explains how to delete a file.

Displaying the File Operation Window

1. Press [FILE] to display the file operation window.

Refer
For details on the file operation window, refer to page 3-90.

2. Press [F1] (FILE OPERATION).


A selection window will appear.

TIP

*SAVE
RECALL
Selectable
DELETE
file operations
PRINT
COPY

*: Indicates the default setting.

3. Locate the cursor to “DELETE” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

6-7
Chapter 6 FILE OPERATION

4. Press [ENTER] to change file operation.


The following window will appear.

Selecting a Drive

Caution If no drives are installed on the instrument or if they are installed but not connected,
it is not possible to select them. In this case, only files that are stored in the internal
memory can be deleted. In the case of the floppy disk drive, this function is not
possible unless a floppy disk is inserted into the floppy disk drive.

5. Select the drive.

Refer
For the method of changing the drive, refer to page 3-92.

6-8
Chapter 6 FILE OPERATION

Selecting a Folder

6. Select the desired folder.

Refer For the method of selecting a folder, refer to page 3-93.

Selecting a File Type (Extension)

7. Select the file type of the file to be deleted.

Refer For the method of selecting a file type, refer to page 3-95.

TIP

.SOR Displays a list of files saved in the file type that conforms
to Bellcore GR-196-CORE and Telcordia SR-4731.

.TRD (AQ7260) Displays a list of files that have been saved by AQ7260.
.SET (Setup) Displays a list of files containing only the measurement
conditions.
.LST (Event List) Displays a list of files containing an event list.
Selectable
file types .BMP (Image) Displays a list of files that have been saved in BITMAP
format.
.TIF (Image) Displays a list of files that have been saved in TIFF
format.
.CSV Displays a list of files that have been saved in CSV
format.
*.* (All) Displays a list of the files stored in the specified folder.

6-9
Chapter 6 FILE OPERATION

Selecting the File to be Deleted

8. Locate the cursor to the file to be deleted by turning the rotary knob.

9. Press [F2] (FILE SELECT) to select the file.

TIP
•The color of the selected file name will change. “*” also appears in front of the file
name. (Refer to page 6-6.)

•If a file(s) that you do not want to delete is selected by mistake, repeat steps 8 and
9. This will cancel selection of that file(s).

•When you want to delete all the files displayed in the list, they can be selected by
pressing [F3] (ALL FILE SELECT) at step 8.

•By pressing [SCALE], the file list display format can be changed. However, if “FILE
NAME + LABEL” is selected, it will take some time before the file list is displayed.
(Refer to page 6-6.)

6-10
Chapter 6 FILE OPERATION

Deleting the Selected File(s)

10. Press [F4] (EXECUTE).


The following window will appear.

11. Press [F5] (YES) to delete the selected file(s).

TIP
If [F1] (NO) is pressed, the procedure will go back to the end of step 9.

6-11
Chapter 6 FILE OPERATION

Printing a File
This section explains how to print the data saved in a file.

Caution Before starting to print, make sure that a printer is connected to the instrument and
correct print settings are made.

Refer For the method of connecting/selecting a printer, refer to pages 8-3, 8-6, 8-16, and
8-18.

Displaying the File Operation Window

1. Press [FILE] to display the file operation window.

Refer For details on the file operation window, refer to page 3-90.

2. Press [F1] (FILE OPERATION).


A selection window will appear.

TIP

*SAVE
RECALL
Selectable
DELETE
file operations
PRINT
COPY

*: Indicates the default setting.

6-12
Chapter 6 FILE OPERATION

3. Locate the cursor to “PRINT” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

4. Press [ENTER] to change file operation.


The following window will appear.

Selecting a Drive

Caution If no drives are installed on the instrument or if they are installed but not connected,
it is not possible to select them. In this case, only files that are stored in the internal
memory can be printed. In the case of the floppy disk drive, this function is not
possible unless a floppy disk is inserted into the floppy disk drive.

5. Select the drive.

Refer
For the method of changing the drive, refer to page 3-92.

6-13
Chapter 6 FILE OPERATION

Selecting a Folder

6. Select the desired folder.

Refer
For the method of selecting a folder, refer to page 3-93.

Selecting a File Type (Extension)

7. Select the file type of the file to be printed.

Refer For the method of selecting a file type, refer to page 3-95.

TIP

.SOR Displays a list of files saved in the file type that


conforms to Bellcore GR-196-CORE and Telcordia
SR-4731.
.TRD (AQ7260) Displays a list of files that have been saved by
AQ7260.
Selectable .LST (Event List) Displays a list of files containing an event list.
file types .TRB (AQ7250) Displays a list of files that have been saved by
AQ7250.
.TRA (AQ7210/20) Displays a list of files that have been saved by
AQ7210/20.
.4 (AQ-7140C/D) Displays a list of files that have been saved by
AQ-7140C/D.

6-14
Chapter 6 FILE OPERATION

Selecting a Print Type

8. Select the desired print type.

TIP
The print type can also be selected in the SETTING mode.

Refer For details on print type, refer to page 2-39.

Selecting a Print Color

9. Select the desired print color.

TIP
The print type can also be selected in the SETTING mode.

Refer For the method of selecting a print color, refer to page 2-41.

6-15
Chapter 6 FILE OPERATION

Selecting a Print Object

The print object can be changed as explained below.


♦ Example: “TRACE + LIST” → “TRACE”

Caution The print object cannot be changed if “.LST” has been selected as the file type.

10. Locate the cursor to “PRINT OBJECT” by using the arrow key.

11. Press [ENTER].


A selection window will appear.

TIP
*TRACE + LIST Prints both the trace and event list.
Selectable
TRACE Prints the trace only.
objects
LIST Prints the event list only.
*: Indicates the default setting.

12. Locate the cursor to “TRACE” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

13. Press [ENTER] to register the change made to the print object setting.

6-16
Chapter 6 FILE OPERATION

Selecting the File to be Printed

14. Locate the cursor to the file to be printed by turning the rotary knob.

15. Press [F2] (FILE SELECT) to select the file.

TIP
•The color of the selected file name will change. “*” also appears in front of the file
name. (Refer to page 6-6.)

•If a file(s) that you do not want to print is selected by mistake, repeat steps 14 and
15. This will cancel selection of that file(s).

•When you want to print all the files displayed in the list, they can be selected by
pressing [F3] (ALL FILE SELECT) at step 14. (Refer to page 6-10.)

•By pressing [SCALE], the file list display format can be changed. However, if “FILE
NAME + LABEL” is selected, it will take some time before the file list is displayed.
(Refer to page 6-6.)

Printing the Selected File(s)

16. Press [F4] (EXECUTE).

Caution
Once printing starts, it cannot be stopped halfway.

6-17
Chapter 6 FILE OPERATION

Copying a File
This section explains how to copy a file to another folder.

Displaying the File Operation Window

1. Press [FILE] to display the file operation window.

Refer
For details on the file operation window, refer to page 3-90.

2. Press [F1] (FILE OPERATION).


A selection window will appear.

TIP

*SAVE
RECALL
Selectable
DELETE
file operations
PRINT
COPY

*: Indicates the default setting.

3. Locate the cursor to “COPY” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

6-18
Chapter 6 FILE OPERATION

4. Press [ENTER] to change file operation.


The following window will appear.

Selecting the Copy Source/Destination (Drive)

Caution If no drives are installed on the instrument or if they are installed but not connected,
it is not possible to select them. In this case, files can be copied within the internal
memory. In the case of the floppy disk drive, this function is not possible unless a
floppy disk is inserted into the floppy disk drive.

5. Select the drive.

Refer
For the method of changing the drive, refer to page 3-92.

6-19
Chapter 6 FILE OPERATION

Selecting the Copy Source/Destination (Folder)

6. Select the desired folder.

Refer For the method of selecting a folder, refer to page 3-93.

Selecting a File Type (Extension)

7. Select the file type of the file to be copied.

Refer For the method of selecting a file type, refer to page 3-95.

TIP

.SOR Displays a list of files saved in the file type that conforms to
Bellcore GR-196-CORE and Telcordia SR-4731.
.TRD (AQ7260) Displays a list of files that have been saved by AQ7260.
.SET (Setup) Displays a list of files containing only the measurement
conditions.
Selectable
.LST (Event List) Displays a list of files containing an event list.
file types
.BMP (Image) Displays a list of files that have been saved in BITMAP
format.
.TIF (Image) Displays a list of files that have been saved in TIFF format.
.CSV Displays a list of files that have been saved in CSV format.
*.* (All) Displays a list of the files stored in the specified folder.

6-20
Chapter 6 FILE OPERATION

Selecting the File to be Copied

8. Locate the cursor to the file to be copied by turning the rotary knob.

9. Press [F2] (FILE SELECT) to select the file.

TIP
•The color of the selected file name will change. “*” also appears in front of the
beginning of the file name. (Refer to page 6-6.)

•If a file(s) that you do not want to copy is selected by mistake, repeat steps 8 and
9. This will cancel selection of that file(s).

•When you want to copy all the files displayed in the list, they can be selected by
pressing [F3] (ALL FILE SELECT) at step 8. (Refer to page 6-10.)

•By pressing [SCALE], the file list display format can be changed. However, if “FILE
NAME + LABEL” is selected, it will take some time before the file list is displayed.
(Refer to page 6-6.)

Copying the Selected File(s)

10. Press [F4] (EXECUTE).

6-21
Chapter 6 FILE OPERATION

6.2 Using the Utility Functions


This chapter explains how to use the following utility functions.

• Initializing a drive
• Deleting a folder
• Creating a folder
• Copying a folder

6-22
Chapter 6 FILE OPERATION

Initializing a Drive
This section explains how to initialize the specified storage media.

Caution • Storage media for more than 32G byte cannot be formatted.

• The storage media which does not format by DOS can not be initialized.

1. Press [FILE].

Refer For details on the file operation window, refer to page 3-90.

2. Press [F5] (UTILITY).


The following window will appear.

6-23
Chapter 6 FILE OPERATION

3. Select the drive to be initialized.

Refer
For the method of selecting a drive, refer to page 3-92.

4. Press [F4] (DRIVE INITIALIZE).


The following window will appear.

5. Press [F5] (YES) to start initialization.

Caution All the folders and files in the drive will be deleted.

TIP
The drive will not be initialized if [F1] (NO) is pressed.

6-24
Chapter 6 FILE OPERATION

Deleting a Folder
This section explains how to delete the desired folder.

1. Press [FILE].

Refer For details on the file operation window, refer to page 3-90.

2. Press [F5] (UTILITY).

3. Select the drive that contains the folder to be deleted.

Refer
For the method of selecting a drive, refer to page 3-92.

4. Select the folder to be deleted.

Refer For the method of specifying a folder, refer to page 3-93.

6-25
Chapter 6 FILE OPERATION

5. Press [F2] (FOLDER DELETE).


The following window will appear.

6. Press [F5] (YES) to start deletion.

Caution If the specified folder contains files or sub folders, it cannot be deleted. In this case,
a message will appear, so take necessary steps according the message.

TIP The folder will not be deleted if [F1] (NO) is pressed.

6-26
Chapter 6 FILE OPERATION

Creating a Folder
This section explains how to create a folder.

1. Press [FILE].

Refer For details on the file operation window, refer to page 3-90.

2. Press [F5] (UTILITY).

3. Press [F1] (FOLDER MAKE).


The following window will appear.

6-27
Chapter 6 FILE OPERATION

4. Select the drive in which you want to create a folder.

Refer
For the method of selecting a drive, refer to page 3-92.

5. Select the desired folder.

TIP
A new folder will be created as a sub folder of the selected folder.

Refer For the method of specifying a folder, refer to page 3-93.

6. Press [F1] (FOLDER NAME).


A window allowing you to enter a folder name will appear.

6-28
Chapter 6 FILE OPERATION

7. Enter the desired folder name.

Caution The folder name can consist of up to 16 characters.

Refer For the method of entering a folder name, refer to Chapter 4.

8. Press [F5] (DONE).


The folder name is fixed.

9. Press [F5] (EXECUTE).


The folder is made.

Caution •If the specified folder has a sub folder with the same name as the one you are
going to create, the folder cannot be created. In this case, a message will appear,
so take necessary steps according the message.

•It is not allowed to use a space nor a period (.) as the first or last character of a
folder name.

6-29
Chapter 6 FILE OPERATION

Copying a Folder
This section explains how to copy a folder.

1. Press [FILE].

Refer For details on the file operation window, refer to page 3-90.

2. Press [F5] (UTILITY).

3. Press [F3] (FOLDER COPY).


The following window will appear.

6-30
Chapter 6 FILE OPERATION

4. Select the drive that contains the folder to be copied.

Refer
For the method of selecting a drive, refer to page 3-92.

5. Select the folder to be copied.

Refer
For the method of specifying a folder, refer to page 3-93.

6. Select the drive to which the folder is to be copied.

Refer
For the method of selecting a drive, refer to page 3-92.

7. Select the copy destination folder.

TIP
The copy source folder will be copied as a sub folder of the selected folder.

Refer For the method of specifying a folder, refer to page 3-93.

8. Press [F5] (EXECUTE) to create the specified folder.

Caution If the destination folder contains files or sub folders, it cannot be copied. In this
case, a message will appear, so take necessary steps according the message.

6-31
Chapter 7
USING USEFUL FUNCTIONS

7.1 Initializing the Vertical-/Horizontal-Axis Scales ......................................................... 7-2


7.2 Displaying Approximate Lines .................................................................................. 7-3
7.3 Using the Cursor Link Function ................................................................................ 7-7
7.4 Using the Label Fixed Form Input Function.............................................................7-11
7.5 Using the Label Auto Increment Function............................................................... 7-13
7.6 Entering Various Information for the Measured Trace ............................................ 7-16
7.7 Changing the Distance Reference.......................................................................... 7-27
7.8 Using the Event Fix Function.................................................................................. 7-33
7.9 Using the Section Analysis Function ...................................................................... 7-36
7.10 Manipulating Two or More Traces .......................................................................... 7-39
7.11 Using the Light Source Function ............................................................................ 7-47
7.12 Making a Measurement Continuously Changing the Wavelengths ........................ 7-52
Chapter 7 USING USEFUL FUNCTIONS

7.1 Initializing the Vertical-/Horizontal-Axis Scales


This section explains how to restore the original scale of the trace that has been enlarged,
reduced or shifted.

I wonder if the
vertical-/horizontal-axis scales
could be initialized easily.

1. Press [MODE] to locate the cursor to “MARKER”.

2. Press [F5] (NEXT PAGE).

3. Press [F5] (AUXILIARY FUNCTION).

4. Press [F1] (SCALE INITIALIZE).


The scales will be initialized.

TIP
Both the vertical-axis and horizontal-axis scales will be initialized at the same time.

7-2
Chapter 7 USING USEFUL FUNCTIONS

7.2 Displaying Approximate Lines


This section explains how to change the approximate line display setting.
♦ Example: “NonDISPLAY” → “DISPLAY”

Refer
For details on approximate method and approximate line, refer to page 3-38.

I wonder if approximate lines could


be displayed.

7-3
Chapter 7 USING USEFUL FUNCTIONS

For Traces that Have Been Auto Searched

Refer
For the window that shows auto search results at the end of measurement, refer to
page 3-69.

1. Press [F1](SCREEN).
A selection window will appear.

TIP
*TRACE + LIST
Selectable
LIST
screens
TRACE

*: Indicates the default setting.

2. Locate the cursor to “TRACE” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

3. Press [ENTER].
A new window will appear.

Refer
For details on the window, refer to page 5-4.

4. Press [F2] (EVENT EDIT).

5. Press [F3] (EVENT MARKER EDIT).

6. Press [F5] (AUXILIARY FUNCTION).

7-4
Chapter 7 USING USEFUL FUNCTIONS

7. Press [F4] (APPROX. LINE).


A selection window will appear.

TIP
Selectable *NonDISPLAY
approximate line setting DISPLAY
*: Indicates the default setting.

8. Locate the cursor to “DISPLAY” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

9. Press [ENTER].
An approximate line will appear.

Caution
No approximate line will appear if no markers have been set.

TIP

7-5
Chapter 7 USING USEFUL FUNCTIONS

For Traces that Have Not Been Auto Searched

Refer
For the window that is displayed just after measurement is finished (without auto
search), refer to page 3-72.

1. Press [MODE] to locate the cursor to “MARKER”.

2. Press [F5] (NEXT PAGE).

3. Press [F5] (AUXILIARY FUNCTION).

4. Press [F3] (APPROX. LINE).


A selection window will appear.

TIP
Selectable *NonDISPLAY Hides the approximate line.
approximate line setting DISPLAY Shows the approximate line.
*: Indicates the default setting.

5. Locate the cursor to “DISPLAY” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

6. Press [ENTER].
An approximate line will appear.

Caution
No approximate line will appear if no markers have been set.

7-6
Chapter 7 USING USEFUL FUNCTIONS

7.3 Using the Cursor Link Function


The cursor link function keeps a certain distance among markers ( 1 to 3 , Y1 to Y3). For
instance, when the cursor is moved 1km, all the markers will be moved 1km in the same
direction as the cursor.
The method of changing the cursor link setting is given below.
♦ Example: “OFF” → “ON”

TIP
•The cursor link function must be used when you want to change marker positions
without changing the distances among the markers.

•The cursor link setting will be retained in the internal memory even if the
instrument is turned OFF. So, when the instrument is turned ON, the cursor link
setting in effect just before the instrument was turned OFF last time will be
restored.

I wonder if the markers could be


moved at once.

7-7
Chapter 7 USING USEFUL FUNCTIONS

For Traces that Have Been Auto Searched

Refer
For the window that shows auto search results at the end of measurement, refer to
page 3-69.

1. Press [F1](SCREEN).
A selection window will appear.

TIP
*TRACE + LIST
Selectable
LIST
screens
TRACE

*: Indicates the default setting.

2. Locate the cursor to “TRACE” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

3. Press [ENTER].
A new window will appear.

Refer
For details on the window, refer to page 5-4.

4. Press [F2] (EVENT EDIT).

5. Press [F3] (EVENT MARKER EDIT).

6. Press [F5] (AUXILIARY FUNCTION).

7-8
Chapter 7 USING USEFUL FUNCTIONS

7. Press [F5] (CURSOR LINK).


A selection window will appear.

TIP
Selectable *OFF
cursor link ON
*: Indicates the default setting.

8. Locate the cursor to “ON” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

9. Press [ENTER].
The cursor link function will be enabled and “LNK” will be displayed at the left edge of
the window.

Refer
For details on “LNK”, refer to page 1-42.

10. Turn the rotary knob to move the cursor.


As the cursor moves, all the markers will move accordingly.

7-9
Chapter 7 USING USEFUL FUNCTIONS

For Traces that Have Not Been Auto Searched

Refer For the window that is displayed just after measurement is finished (without auto
search), refer to page 3-72.

1. Press [MODE] to locate the cursor to “MARKER”.

2. Press [F5] (NEXT PAGE).

3. Press [F5] (AUXILIARY FUNCTION).

4. Press [F5] (CURSOR LINK).


A selection window will appear.

TIP
Selectable *OFF
cursor link ON
*: Indicates the default setting.

5. Locate the cursor to “ON” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

6. Press [ENTER].
The cursor link function will be enabled and “LNK” will be displayed at the left edge of
the window.

Refer
For details on “LNK”, refer to page 1-42.

7. Turn the rotary knob to move the cursor.


As the cursor moves, all the markers will move accordingly.

7-10
Chapter 7 USING USEFUL FUNCTIONS

7.4 Using the Label Fixed Form Input Function


When labels are added to traces, they will be stored in the internal memory automatically.
The label fixed form input function allows you to import a label from the memory (edit it if
necessary) and add it to the current trace.
This section explains how to select a label that has been entered before.

TIP Up to 100 labels can be stored in the internal memory.

I wonder I could use a label


that was entered before.

1. Press [MODE] to locate the cursor to “TRACE”.

2. Press [F2] (LABEL).


A window allowing you to enter a label will appear.

3. Press [F3] (FIXED FORM INPUT).


A list of labels that were entered before will appear.

TIP
The list shows labels in order, with the latest label at the top of the list.

4. Locate the cursor to the desired label by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

7-11
Chapter 7 USING USEFUL FUNCTIONS

5. Press [F1] (SELECT).


A character input window will appear, with the selected label displayed in the label
field.
If necessary, edit the label.

Refer
For the method of editing a label, refer to page 4-7.

6. Press [F5] (DONE) to confirm the label.

TIP
•The internal memory can accommodate up to 100 labels. So, the 101st label will
be deleted automatically. However, labels you do not want deleted can be
protected.

1.Locate the cursor to the label to be protected.

2.Press [F2] (RESERVE) to protect it.

“*” will appear in front of the label indicating that it is protected.

•The label list can be saved to a storage media in TXT format.

1.Press [F5] (LABEL LIST SAVE/RECALL) to switch [F1] (FILE OPERATION)

to “SAVE”.

2.For the method of saving the label list, refer to page 3-88.

•A label list can be created using a personal computer and recalled to the
instrument.

1.Press [F5] (LABEL LIST SAVE/RECALL) to switch [F1] (FILE OPERATION)

to “RECALL”.

2.For the method of recalling a label list, refer to page 6-3.

Caution
•Up to 50 labels can be protected.

•When creating a label list using a personal computer, the following must be
observed.

Number of characters : Max. 36 characters

Number of labels : Max. 100 labels

File format : txt (text) format

7-12
Chapter 7 USING USEFUL FUNCTIONS

7.5 Using the Label Auto Increment Function


The label auto increment function allows you to add a number at the end of the label and
increase the number by one automatically. This function is useful when measuring a
multi-fiber cable.
This section explains how to set the label auto increment function.

I wonder if I could update


label number automatically.

1. Press [MODE] to locate the cursor to “TRACE”.

2. Press [F2] (LABEL).


A character input window will appear.

3. Press [F3] (FIXED FORM INPUT).

4. Press [F3] (LABEL NUMBER).


A selection window will appear.

TIP
Selectable *OFF
settings ON
*: Indicates the default setting.

5. Locate the cursor to “ON” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

7-13
Chapter 7 USING USEFUL FUNCTIONS

6. Press [ENTER].
The following window will appear.

7. Locate the cursor to “START No.” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

TIP
“START No.” is already highlighted when this window appears.

8. Press [ENTER].
A selection window will appear.

TIP

*001

Selectable to
start No. 999
(1 step)

*: Indicates the default setting.

9. Enter the desired start No.

10. Locate the cursor to “SUB No.” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

7-14
Chapter 7 USING USEFUL FUNCTIONS

11. Press [ENTER].


A selection window will appear.

TIP
*NONE
a-b
a-c
Selectable a-d

sub No. a-e


a-f
a-g

a-h

*: Indicates the default setting.

The label No. will increase as follows when “NONE” or “a-c” is selected.

NONE: 001→002→003→004→xxx

a-c: 001a→001b→001c→002a→002b→002c→xxx

(When the start No. is set to “001”)

12. Select “SUB No.” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

13. Press [ENTER] to confirm the sub No.

14. Press [F1] (DONE) to confirm the label No.


A character input window will appear, with the specified label No. shown in the label
field.

15. Press [F5] (DONE) to confirm the label.

TIP
The label No. will be increased by one when the next measurement is started after
the measured data is saved.

7-15
Chapter 7 USING USEFUL FUNCTIONS

7.6 Entering Various Information for the Measured


Trace
In addition to a label, this instrument allows you to enter various pieces of information
regarding the measured trace.
The items that can be entered are shown below.

• Company name
• Name
• Cable ID
• Fiber ID
• Fiber type
• Cable code
• Originating location
• Terminating location
• Current data flag

The section explains how to enter these items.

TIP
•Once information is entered, it will be retained until new information is entered.

•The entered information will be saved together with the measured data (in SOR
and TRD format).

Refer
For the method of entering a label, refer to Chapter 4 and page 7-11.

I wonder if I could enter various


pieces of information.

7-16
Chapter 7 USING USEFUL FUNCTIONS

Displaying the Detailed Information Input Window

1. Press [MODE] to locate the cursor to “TRACE”.

2. Press [F2] (LABEL).


A window allowing you to enter a label will appear.

3. Press [F4] (DETAILED INFORMATION INPUT).


A window allowing you to enter detailed information will appear.

TIP
If [F1] (ALL DELETE) is pressed, all the currently entered characters will be
deleted.

7-17
Chapter 7 USING USEFUL FUNCTIONS

Entering Detailed Information


Entering the Company Name

1. Locate the cursor to “COMPANY NAME” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

TIP
The cursor is already located at “COMPANY NAME” when the detailed information
input window appears.

2. Press [ENTER].
A character input window will appear.

Caution The company name can consist of up to 36 characters.

Refer For the method of entering characters, refer to Chapter 4.

7-18
Chapter 7 USING USEFUL FUNCTIONS

Entering the Name

1. Locate the cursor to “NAME” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

2. Press [ENTER].
A character input window will appear.

Caution
The name can consist of up to 36 characters.

Refer
For the method of entering characters, refer to Chapter 4.

7-19
Chapter 7 USING USEFUL FUNCTIONS

Entering the Cable ID

1. Locate the cursor to “CABLE ID” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

2. Press [ENTER].
A character input window will appear.

Caution The cable ID can consist of up to 36 characters.

Refer
For the method of entering characters, refer to Chapter 4.

7-20
Chapter 7 USING USEFUL FUNCTIONS

Entering the Fiber ID

1. Locate the cursor to “FIBER ID” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

2. Press [ENTER].
A character input window will appear.

Caution The fiber ID can consist of up to 36 characters.

Refer
For the method of entering characters, refer to Chapter 4.

7-21
Chapter 7 USING USEFUL FUNCTIONS

Entering the Fiber Type

1. Locate the cursor to “FIBER TYPE” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

2. Press [ENTER].
A selection window will appear.

TIP
*SMF(652) Single mode fiber
Selectable DSF(653) Dispersion-shifted fiber
fiber types NZ-DSF (655) Non-zero dispersion shifted single mode fiber
MMF(651) Multi mode fiber

*: Indicates the default setting.

3. Locate the cursor to the type of currently measured optical fiber by using the
rotary knob or [S] / [T].

4. Press [ENTER] to register the change made to the fiber type.

7-22
Chapter 7 USING USEFUL FUNCTIONS

Entering the Cable Code

1. Locate the cursor to “CABLE CODE” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

2. Press [ENTER].
A character input window will appear.

Caution The cable code can consist of up to 36 characters.

Refer
For the method of entering characters, refer to Chapter 4.

7-23
Chapter 7 USING USEFUL FUNCTIONS

Entering the Originating Location

1. Locate the cursor to “ORIGINATING LOCATION” by using the rotary knob or


[S] / [T].

2. Press [ENTER].
A character input window will appear.

Caution The originating location can consist of up to 36 characters.

Refer
For the method of entering characters, refer to Chapter 4.

7-24
Chapter 7 USING USEFUL FUNCTIONS

Entering the Terminating Location

1. Locate the cursor to “TERMINATING LOCATION” by using the rotary knob or


[S] / [T].

2. Press [ENTER].
A character input window will appear.

Caution
The terminating location can consist of up to 36 characters.

Refer
For the method of entering characters, refer to Chapter 4.

7-25
Chapter 7 USING USEFUL FUNCTIONS

Changing the Current Data Flag

1. Locate the cursor to “CURRENT DATA FLAG” by using the rotary knob or [S] /
[T].

2. Press [ENTER].
A selection window will appear.

TIP
*BUILT (BC)
Selectable
REPAIRED (RC)
current data flags
OTHER (OT)
*: Indicates the default setting.

3. Locate the cursor to the desired current data flag by using the rotary knob or
[S] / [T].

4. Press [ENTER] to register the change made to the data flag setting.

7-26
Chapter 7 USING USEFUL FUNCTIONS

7.7 Changing the Distance Reference


Normally, the instrument considers the distance reference to be the connection point
between the instrument and the optical fiber to be measured, and calculates all the
distance data, such as cursor position and marker positions, based on the distance
reference.
This instrument allows you to change the distance reference freely. The distance
reference is always displayed as “0km”.
This section explains how to change the distance reference.

I wonder if I could change the


display position of “0km”.

7-27
Chapter 7 USING USEFUL FUNCTIONS

For Traces that Have Been Auto Searched

Refer
For the window that shows auto search results at the end of measurement, refer to
page 3-69.

1. Press [F1](SCREEN).
A selection window will appear.

TIP
*TRACE + LIST
Selectable
LIST
screens
TRACE
*: Indicates the default setting.

2. Locate the cursor to “TRACE” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

3. Press [ENTER].
A new window will appear.

Refer
For details on the window, refer to page 5-4.

4. Press [F2] (EVENT EDIT).

5. Press [F3] (EVENT MARKER EDIT).

6. Press [F5] (AUXILIARY FUNCTION).

7-28
Chapter 7 USING USEFUL FUNCTIONS

7. Locate the cursor to the point to which the distance reference is to be set, by
turning the rotary knob.

TIP
To display the cursor at an accurate position, enlarge the trace.

Refer
For the method of enlarging the trace, refer to page 3-66.

8. Press [F3] (DISTANCE REFERENCE SET).


The cursor position will be set as the distance reference.
“REF” will be displayed at the left edge of the window.

Caution
•All the distance data will be re-calculated based on the new distance reference.

•Only the events present after the distance reference will be displayed.

•When distance reference is changed, other operation for event edit are canceled.

7-29
Chapter 7 USING USEFUL FUNCTIONS

TIP
•Carrying out step 7 with the distance reference set will restore the connection
point between the instrument and optical fiber as the distance reference.

•The mark shape of the distance reference can be changed.

Refer
For the method of changing the distance reference mark, refer to page 2-19.

7-30
Chapter 7 USING USEFUL FUNCTIONS

For Traces that Have Not Been Auto Searched

Refer
For the window that is displayed just after measurement is finished (without auto
search), refer to page 3-72.

1. Press [MODE] to locate the cursor to “MARKER”.

2. Press [F5] (NEXT PAGE).

3. Press [F5] (AUXILIARY FUNCTION).

4. Locate the cursor to the point to which the distance reference is to be set, by
turning the rotary knob.

TIP
To display the cursor at an accurate position, enlarge the trace.

Refer
For the method of enlarging the trace, refer to page 3-66.

7-31
Chapter 7 USING USEFUL FUNCTIONS

5. Press [F2] (DISTANCE REFERENCE SET).


The cursor position will be set as the distance reference.
“REF” will be displayed at the left edge of the window.

Caution •All the distance data will be re-calculated based on the new distance reference.

TIP
•Carrying out step 4 with the distance reference set will restore the connection
point between the instrument and optical fiber as the distance reference.

•The mark shape of the distance reference can be changed.

•If auto search is executed with the distance reference set, events present after the
distance reference will be detected.

Refer
For the method of changing the distance reference mark, refer to page 2-19.

7-32
Chapter 7 USING USEFUL FUNCTIONS

7.8 Using the Event Fix Function


When a master event is created and auto search is performed for the measured trace, this
event fix function displays the information for the same distance as the master event.
This function is useful for measurements like measurement of multi-fiber cables, in which
the distances to the events occurring in each fiber are expected to be the same.
This section explains how to create a master event and how to use it.

I wonder if I could get


information at the same
distance every time.

1. Measure the optical fiber and perform auto search.

Refer
•For the method of measuring an optical fiber and performing auto search, refer to
page 3-57.

•For the window that shows auto search results at the end of measurement, refer
to page 3-69.

2. Press [F1] (SCREEN).


A selection window will appear.

TIP
*TRACE + LIST
Selectable
LIST
screens
TRACE
*: Indicates the default setting.

3. Locate the cursor to “LIST” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

7-33
Chapter 7 USING USEFUL FUNCTIONS

4. Press [ENTER].
A new window will appear.

Refer
For details on the window, refer to page 3-107.

5. Press [F3] (LIST EDIT).


A new window will appear.

Refer
For details on the window, refer to page 5-17.

6. Press [F2] (EVENT FIX).


A selection window will appear.

TIP
Selectable event *OFF
fix settings ON
*: Indicates the default setting.

7. Locate the cursor to “ON” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

8. Press [ENTER].
The currently displayed event will be set as the master event.

9. Measure a new optical fiber and perform auto search. The information at the
position at the same distance as the master event will be displayed.

7-34
Chapter 7 USING USEFUL FUNCTIONS

Caution
• The event fix function will be turned OFF (disabled) if measurement conditions
(wavelength, distance range, pulse width, data size) are changed. It will also be
turned OFF if the horizontal-axis scale is increased/decreased during real-time
measurement.

•If an event other than the master event is found when another optical fiber is
measured and an event search is executed, the event is also displayed.

• If end point shorter than end point of master event is found when another optical
fiber measured and event search is executed, bellow message is displayed. And
comment as “EVENT SEARCH detect as END point” is displayed in Event note.

Irregular end point alert.

Push any key.

7-35
Chapter 7 USING USEFUL FUNCTIONS

7.9 Using the Section Analysis Function


The section analysis function allows you to calculate total return loss and total loss within
the specified section.
This section explains how to specify a section.

I wonder if I could get


information for a certain
section only.

1. Measure the optical fiber and perform auto search.

Refer
•For the method of measuring an optical fiber and performing auto search, refer to
page 3-57.

•For the window that shows auto search results at the end of measurement, refer
to page 3-69.

2. Press [F1] (SCREEN).


A selection window will appear.

TIP
*TRACE + LIST
Selectable
LIST
screens
TRACE
*: Indicates the default setting.

3. Locate the cursor to “TRACE” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

7-36
Chapter 7 USING USEFUL FUNCTIONS

4. Press [ENTER].
A new window will appear.

Refer
For details on the window, refer to page 5-4.

5. Press [F3] (SECTION ANALYSIS).

6. Locate the cursor to the point from which section analysis is to be started, and
then press [F1] (START POINT SET).
The S marker will appear at the cursor position.

Refer For the method of moving the cursor, refer to page 3-64.

7. Locate the cursor to the point at which section analysis is to be stopped, and
then press [F2] (STOP POINT SET).
Marker E will appear at the cursor position.
The total return loss and total loss within the specified section (between the specified
two points) will be displayed.

7-37
Chapter 7 USING USEFUL FUNCTIONS

TIP
The total return loss is calculated based on the back scatter level at the near end.
However, it can be re-calculated based on the back scatter level at the desired
position (e.g. section analysis start point) instead of the near end.
The method of changing the reference level is explained below.

1.Move the cursor to the point whose back scatter level is to be set as the

reference level.

2.Press [F3] (REFERENCE LEVEL ADJUST).

A new reference level will be set, and the total return loss will be

re-calculated based on this reference level.

Refer
For the method of moving the cursor, refer to page 3-64.

To cancel the section analysis setting

1. Press [F4] (SET CLEAR).

TIP
Also section analysis setting is canceled, to get out this window (Press [ESC]).

7-38
Chapter 7 USING USEFUL FUNCTIONS

7.10 Manipulating Two or More Traces


This section explains the following functions.

• Displaying multiple traces


• Displaying the subtract trace of two traces
• Merging two traces

I wonder if I could compare the two


traces.

7-39
Chapter 7 USING USEFUL FUNCTIONS

Displaying Multiple Traces


The following two methods are available to display multiple traces.

• By recalling multiple files


• By displaying a new trace while displaying the current trace
• By making a measurement continuously on multiple wavelengths

This section explains how to display a new trace while displaying the current trace.

TIP
• Display example (Four traces display)

Displayed information (file name, measurement conditions, etc) is for current trace.

• When [F3] (SCALE CHANGE) is selected current trace, operations for


enlarge/reduce and sift of trace are as follows.

Enlargement/reduction (horizontal) : Takes effect on the multi traces

Shift (horizontal) : Takes effect on the multi traces.

Enlargement/reduction (vertical) : Takes effect on the multi traces.

Shift (vertical) : Takes effect on the current traces.

7-40
Chapter 7 USING USEFUL FUNCTIONS

Refer
• For the method of recalling multiple files, refer to page 6-3.

• For the method to make a measurement continuously on multiple wavelengths,


refer to page 7-52.

1. Display a trace.
Perform measurement or recall one file to display the window that is displayed before
Auto search.

Refer
For details on the window, refer to page 3-72.

2. Press [F4] (TRACE FIX).


A selection window will appear.

TIP
Selectable trace *OFF
fix settings ON

*: Indicates the default setting.

3. Locate the cursor to “ON” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

4. Press [ENTER].
The current trace will be fixed.

TIP
The color of the trace will change if the display color is not currently set to “B&W”.

Refer
For the method of changing the display color, refer to page 2-22.

7-41
Chapter 7 USING USEFUL FUNCTIONS

5. Change measurement conditions and start measurement.


A new trace will be displayed.

Caution
The fixed trace will be discarded if the distance range is changed.

7-42
Chapter 7 USING USEFUL FUNCTIONS

Displaying the Subtract Trace of Two Traces


Displaying the Subtract Trace

This section explains how to display the subtract trace of two traces (reference trace,
target trace).

Caution The subtract trace cannot be displayed unless the following measurement
conditions are the same for both the reference and target traces.

•Distance range

•Sampling resolution

•Actual data size

1. Display the traces.

Refer
For the method of displaying two or more traces, refer to page 6-3.

2. Press [F4] (SUBTRACT TRACE)*1.


The subtract trace will be displayed.
*1: If the window (page 3-71) is currently displayed, the subtract trace can be
displayed by pressing [F5] (MULTI TRACE FUNCTION) instead of [F4]
(SUBTRACT TRACE).

TIP The reference and object traces can be changed by pressing [F1] and [F2].

7-43
Chapter 7 USING USEFUL FUNCTIONS

Analyzing the Subtract Trace

This section explains how to set markers A and B on the subtract trace and calculate the
loss occurring between those marker points.

1. Locate the cursor to the position to which marker A is to be set.

2. Press [F3] (MARKER A).


Marker A will appear at the cursor position.

3. Locate the cursor to the position to which marker B is to be set.

4. Press [F4] (MARKER B).


Marker B and analysis results will appear at the cursor position.

Marker A: 1 km
Marker B: 2 km
Subtract trace
3 dB
4 dB/km
5 dB

1 Distance from distance reference to marker A


2 Distance from distance reference to marker B
3 Loss between points A and B on the target trace
4 Loss per km between points A and B on the target trace
5 Return loss between points A and B on the target trace

TIP
Analyzed by approximate method of reference trace.

It is not possible to save the subtract trace and analysis results.

Refer
For details on approximate method, refer to page 3-38.

To clear the markers

1. Press [F5] (MARKER DELETE).

7-44
Chapter 7 USING USEFUL FUNCTIONS

Merging Two Traces


The 2-way trace function allows you to merge the events detected on an optical fiber in the
direction from end A to end B with those detected in the direction from end B to end A.

End A End B
× × × × × ×
S 1 2 3 4 E
+
End A End B
× × × × × ×
E 4 3 2 1 S

× × × × × × ×
S 1 2 3 4 5 E

Merging Events

This section explains how to merge events of two traces.

1. Recall two files.

Caution •The 2-way trace function can be used only when two files are recalled (same file
type). It cannot be used if three or more files are recalled.

•The 2-way trace function cannot be used unless the following measurement
conditions are the same for both the two recalled traces.

Wavelength

Distance range

Pulse width

Sampling resolution

Actual data size

Refer
For the method of recalling two files, refer to page 6-3.

7-45
Chapter 7 USING USEFUL FUNCTIONS

2. Press [F5] (2WAY TRACE).


The following window will appear.

A list of merged events will be shown.

TIP
•The merged trace of the two traces will not be displayed. But all of event maker
displayed on the original direction trace.

•The merged event list can be saved.

•The merged event list can be printed.

•A comment can be added to the merged event list.

Refer
•For the method of saving the event list, refer to page 3-89.

•For the method of printing the event list, refer to page 3-106.

•For the method of adding a comment to the event list, refer to page 5-23.

7-46
Chapter 7 USING USEFUL FUNCTIONS

7.11 Using the Light Source Function


The light source function allows use of the instrument as a light source, not as an OTDR.
This section explains how to use the instrument as a light source.

I wonder if I could use the


instrument as a light source.

Caution The instrument cannot be used as a light source if an optical module


(AQ7261/AQ7269) is installed.

TIP
The light source wavelength and modulation frequency that can be used vary with
the optical module installed.
They are shown below per available optical module.

Optical module Wavelength Modulation frequency


AQ7261 ---------- -----------------
AQ7264 1310nm, 1550nm CW, CHOP (270Hz, 1kHz, 2kHz)
AQ7265 1310nm, 1550nm CW, CHOP (270Hz, 1kHz, 2kHz)
AQ7269 ---------- -----------------

Refer
For detail on output level, refer to Chapter 9.

7-47
Chapter 7 USING USEFUL FUNCTIONS

Displaying the Light Source Function Window

1. Press [MODE] to locate the cursor to “OPTION”.


The following window will appear.

Caution
“OPTION” cannot be selected if an optical module (AQ7261/AQ7269) is installed.

7-48
Chapter 7 USING USEFUL FUNCTIONS

Changing the Wavelength and Modulation Frequency


Changing the Wavelength

The wavelength can be changed as explained below.


♦ Example: “1310nm” → “1550nm”

1. Locate the cursor to “WAVELENGTH” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

TIP
“WAVELENGTH” is already highlighted when the source function appears.

2. Press [ENTER].
A selection window will appear.

TIP
Selectable *1310nm
wavelengths 1550nm

*: Indicates the default setting.

3. Locate the cursor to “1550nm” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

4. Press [ENTER] to register the change made to the wavelength setting.

7-49
Chapter 7 USING USEFUL FUNCTIONS

Changing the Modulation Frequency

The modulation frequency can be changed as explained below.


♦ Example: “CW” → “1kHz”

1. Locate the cursor to “MODULATION” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

2. Press [ENTER].
A selection window will appear.

TIP
*CW
Selectable 270Hz
modulation
frequencies 1kHz
2kHz

*: Indicates the default setting.

3. Locate the cursor to “1kHz” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

4. Press [ENTER] to register the change made to the modulation frequency


setting.

7-50
Chapter 7 USING USEFUL FUNCTIONS

Emitting a Laser

1. Connect an optical fiber to the instrument.

2. Press [F1] (LIGHT SOURCE).


A selection window will appear.

TIP
Selectable *OFF
light source ON

*: Indicates the default setting.

3. Locate the cursor to “ON” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

4. Press [ENTER].
A laser will be emitted and “LASER ON” will appear.

WARNING
Do not disconnect the optical fiber from the instrument while laser is emitted , and do not
stare into the end of the connected optical fiber.
Laser beams are invisible to the naked eye, but if they enter the eyes, they may cause
impaired eyesight.

Turn off a Laser

1. Press [F2] (LIGHT SOURCE OFF).

7-51
Chapter 7 USING USEFUL FUNCTIONS

7.12 Making a Measurement Continuously Changing the


Wavelengths
The characteristics of an optical fiber can be obtained more correctly by measuring the
fiber using two or more wavelengths. This function increases the efficiency of
measurement by saving the work to change the wavelength manually after a
measurement was made on one wavelength.

This section explains the method to make a measurement continuously on one optical
fiber changing the wavelength.
♦ Example: "Single-wavelength measurement with 1.31μm" → "Multi-wavelength
measurement with 1.31μm and 1.55μm"”

I wonder if I could perform a


measurement using two or more
wavelengths.

1. Select file name type including “wavelength”.

Refer For the method to enable the file name type, refer to page 3-97.

2. Display the measurement condition change window.

Refer
For the method of displaying the window, refer to page 3-11.

7-52
Chapter 7 USING USEFUL FUNCTIONS

3. Press [F3] (MULTI WL MEASURE).


A selection window will appear.

TIP
Selectable *OFF
light source ON

*: Indicates the default setting.

4. Locate the cursor to “ON” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

5. Press [ENTER].

6. Press [F5] (MULTI WL MEASURE CONDITION).


The following window will appear.

7-53
Chapter 7 USING USEFUL FUNCTIONS

7. Locate the cursor to “SM 1.55μm” by using the rotary knob or arrow key.

8. Press [ENTER] .
" * " is displayed.

TIP • Check to make sure that "*" is added to the traces 1.31μm and 1.55μm.

• Please set group index and back scatter level of each wavelength as the need
arises.

9. Press [F4] (DONE) to register the changes made to the multi wl measurement
conditions.

10. Press [F4] (DONE) to register the changes made to the measurement
conditions.

11. Press [AVE]


Measurements are made sequentially starting from the shorter one.

TIP ・Sample measurement sequence

1. Measurement with the wavelength 1.31μm

2. Event search performed after measurement completed*

3. Measurement data saved*

4. Measurement with the wavelength 1.55μm

5. Event search performed after measurement completed*

6. Measurement data saved*

*: Performed only when the event search and auto saving functions have been set
to ON.

・The number of the file name is used commonly for two wavelength.

7-54
Chapter 7 USING USEFUL FUNCTIONS

Refer • For the method to enable the event search function, refer to page 3-36.

• For the method to enable the auto saving function, refer to page 3-34.

TIP • If [AVE] is pressed during a continuous measurement, the following window will
appear.

• Pressing [F1] (Re-START) restarts the measurement. The measurement starts


from the wavelength at which the measurement was previously stopped. The file
number is not incremented.

• Pressing [F5] (END) stops the continuous measurement. Pressing [AVE] again
restarts the measurement from the wavelength 1310nm. The file number is not
incremented.

7-55
Chapter 8
USING OPTIONS AND EXTERNAL
DEVICES

8.1 Using Options........................................................................................................... 8-2


8.2 Using External Devices ............................................................................................ 8-9
8.3 Operating the Instrument from a Personal Computer............................................. 8-22
Chapter 8 USING OPTIONS AND EXTERNAL DEVICES

8.1 Using Options


This section explains how to connect and remove the following options to the instrument.

• Printer/FDD unit
• Printer unit

8-2
Chapter 8 USING OPTIONS AND EXTERNAL DEVICES

Option Unit
Connecting

This section explains procedure of mounted options to take printer/FDD unit for example.

1. Make sure that the power to the instrument is turned OFF.

WARNING
Do not connect the printer/FDD unit while the power to the instrument is ON.
Failure to observe this may result in an electric shock.

Refer
For the method of turning OFF the power, refer to page 3-108.

2. Remove the cover from the expansion port located on the rear panel of the
instrument.

Caution Keep the removed cover in a safe place to prevent it being lost.

8-3
Chapter 8 USING OPTIONS AND EXTERNAL DEVICES

3. Place the projecting part on the bottom of unit on the rear of instrument.

4. Insert the unit’s connector into the expansion port.

CAUTION
When inserting the connector, hold the unit gently with the palms of your hands.
Take care to hold the unit in such a way that pressure is not exerted on one point only or
that it is held too strongly.
Failure to observe this may result in damage.

5. Secure the unit to the instrument.


Hook the unit’s tab (located on the side of the unit as shown below) to the instrument.

Caution Make sure that the unit’s tab is hooked to the instrument.

8-4
Chapter 8 USING OPTIONS AND EXTERNAL DEVICES

Removing

This section explains procedure of removed options to take printer/FDD unit for example.

1. Make sure that the power to the instrument is turned OFF.

WARNING
Do not remove the printer/FDD unit while the power to the instrument is ON.
Failure to observe this may result in an electric shock.

Refer For the method of turning OFF the power, refer to page 3-108.

2. Release the tab from the instrument.

Caution When releasing the tab, take care not to trap your finger.

3. Lift the unit straight to remove it.

4. Attach the cover to the expansion port.

Caution Make sure that the cover is attached.

8-5
Chapter 8 USING OPTIONS AND EXTERNAL DEVICES

Setting Up the Printer

The instrument allows both optional printer unit and USB printer to be connected at the
same time. In this case, the destination printer (the printer to which you want to print out)
must be set up.
In this section, the method of changing the destination printer from one to the other is
explained below.
♦ Example: “HP” → “EXTENSION UNIT”

Caution Make sure an option printer is connected to the instrument.

1. Press [MODE] to locate the cursor to “SETTING”.

2. Press [F2] (EXTERNAL INSTRUMENT SET).

3. Locate the cursor to “MAKER” by using the rotary knob or the arrow key.

TIP The cursor is already located at “PRINTER” when this window appears.

8-6
Chapter 8 USING OPTIONS AND EXTERNAL DEVICES

4. Press [ENTER].
A selection window will appear.

TIP
*EXTENSION UNIT Prints out to the optional printer unit.
Selectable HP Prints out to the HP printer connected to a USB connector.
printer makers
EPSON Prints out to the EPSON printer connected to a USB
connector.

*: Indicates the default setting.

5. Locate the cursor to “EXTENSION UNIT” by using the rotary knob or the [S] /
[T] .

6. Press [ENTER] to register the change made to the printer maker setting.

8-7
Chapter 8 USING OPTIONS AND EXTERNAL DEVICES

Setting the Recording Paper in the Printer

The recording paper can be set in the printer as explained below.

1. Press down the lever to remove the printer cover.

2. Set the recording paper in the unit.

3. Attach the printer cover.

8-8
Chapter 8 USING OPTIONS AND EXTERNAL DEVICES

8.2 Using External Devices


This instrument allows use of the following external devices by connecting them to USB
ports.

• USB keyboard
• PCMCIA memory card
• USB printer
• USB storage medium (FDD, memory)

This section explains how to connect the above external devices to the instrument and
remove them.

8-9
Chapter 8 USING OPTIONS AND EXTERNAL DEVICES

USB Keyboard
Connecting

A USB keyboard can be connected to the instrument as explained below.

TIP
A USB keyboard can be connected even if the power to the instrument is currently
ON.

1. Open the cover on the top of the instrument.

2. Connect a USB keyboard to a USB connector (host side).

TIP
Two USB connectors (host side) are available, and the keyboard can be connected
to either of these.

8-10
Chapter 8 USING OPTIONS AND EXTERNAL DEVICES

Using

Using a keyboard makes entry of characters easy.


This section explains points to be observed when using a USB keyboard.

Caution The keyboard can be used in character input windows only.

Basically, characters can be entered in the same way as you normally do with a personal
computer.
The following keys on the keyboard have the same effects as those provided on the
instrument.

• F1 → Has the same effect as that when [F1] is pressed.


• F2 → Has the same effect as that when [F2] is pressed.
• F3 → Has the same effect as that when [F3] is pressed.
• F4 → Has the same effect as that when [F4] is pressed.
• F5 → Has the same effect as that when [F5] is pressed.
• F8 → Has the same effect as that when [MODE] is pressed.
• F11 → Has the same effect as that when the rotary knob is turned
counter-clockwise.
• F12 → Has the same effect as that when the rotary knob is turned clockwise.
• Arrow → Has the same effect as that when the arrow key is pressed.
• Home → Has the same effect as that when [SCALE] is pressed.
• Insert → Has the same effect as that when the rotary knob is pressed.
• Enter → Has the same effect as that when [ENTER] is pressed.
• Esc → Has the same effect as that when [ESC] is pressed.

8-11
Chapter 8 USING OPTIONS AND EXTERNAL DEVICES

Removing

The USB keyboard can be removed from the instrument as explained below.

TIP The USB keyboard can be removed even if the power to the instrument is currently
ON.

1. Hold the keyboard cable’s connector and lift it straight to remove the keyboard.

CAUTION
When removing the keyboard, do not pull it by the cable.
Failure to observe this may result in damage.

2. Close the cover on the top of the instrument.

8-12
Chapter 8 USING OPTIONS AND EXTERNAL DEVICES

PCMCIA Memory Card


Connecting

A PCMCIA memory card can be connected to the instrument as explained below.

TIP
A PCMCIA memory card can be connected even if the power to the instrument is
currently ON.

1. Open the cover on the top of the instrument.

2. Insert the memory card into the PCMCIA slot on the instrument.

Caution •When inserting the memory card, make sure it is inserted in the correct direction.

•Also make sure that the memory card’s label side faces the front of the instrument.

8-13
Chapter 8 USING OPTIONS AND EXTERNAL DEVICES

Removing

The PCMCIA memory card can be removed from the instrument as explained below.

TIP
The PCMCIA memory card can be removed even if the power to the instrument is
currently ON.

1. Press [MODE] to locate the cursor to “SETTING”.

2. Press [F4] (PCMCIA REMOVE).


The following window will appear.

8-14
Chapter 8 USING OPTIONS AND EXTERNAL DEVICES

3. Press the card eject button.


The memory card will pop out.

4. Lift the memory card straight to remove it.

Caution Before removing the memory card, make sure that a message stating that the card
can be removed safely is displayed.

5. Close the cover on the top of the instrument.

8-15
Chapter 8 USING OPTIONS AND EXTERNAL DEVICES

USB Printer

Caution The following USB printers available to use this instrument at present.

Hewlett Packard

• Deskjet5160
• Deskjet5168
• Deskjet5740
• Deskjet5748
EPSON

• PX-V500
• Stylus C45

Connecting

A USB printer can be connected to the instrument as explained below.

Caution The instrument allows two USB printers to be connected, but it cannot recognize
them together. So only one USB printer must be connected. If two USB printers are
connected, their operation will not be guaranteed.

TIP
A USB printer can be connected even if the power to the instrument is currently
ON.

1. Open the cover on the top of the instrument.

8-16
Chapter 8 USING OPTIONS AND EXTERNAL DEVICES

2. Connect a USB printer to a USB connector (host side).

TIP Two USB connectors (host side) are available, and the printer can be connected to
either of these.

8-17
Chapter 8 USING OPTIONS AND EXTERNAL DEVICES

Setting Up the Printer

The instrument allows both optional printer unit and USB printer to be connected at the
same time. In this case, the destination printer (the printer to which you want to print out)
must be set up.
In this section, the method of changing the destination printer from one to the other is
explained below.
♦ Example: “EXTENSION UNIT” → “HP”

Caution Make sure a USB printer is connected to the instrument.

1. Press [MODE] to locate the cursor to “SETTING”.

2. Press [F2] (EXTERNAL INSTRUMENT SET).

3. Locate the cursor to “MAKER” by using the rotary knob or the arrow key.

TIP
The cursor is already located at “PRINTER” when this window appears.

8-18
Chapter 8 USING OPTIONS AND EXTERNAL DEVICES

4. Press [ENTER].
A selection window will appear.

TIP
*EXTENSION UNIT Prints out to the optional printer unit.
HP Prints out to the HP printer connected to a USB
Selectable
connector.
printer makers
EPSON Prints out to the EPSON printer connected to a USB
connector.

*: Indicates the default setting.

5. Locate the cursor to “HP” by using the rotary knob or the [S] / [T] .

6. Press [ENTER] to register the change made to the printer maker setting.

8-19
Chapter 8 USING OPTIONS AND EXTERNAL DEVICES

Removing

The USB printer can be removed from the instrument as explained below.

TIP The USB printer can be removed even if the power to the instrument is currently
ON.

1. Hold the printer cable’s connector and lift it straight to remove the printer.

CAUTION
When removing the printer, do not pull it by the cable.
Failure to observe this may result in damage.

2. Close the cover on the top of the instrument.

8-20
Chapter 8 USING OPTIONS AND EXTERNAL DEVICES

USB Storage Medium


Connecting

A USB storage medium (FDD, memory) can be connected to the instrument as explained
below.

Caution •The instrument cannot recognize two USB storage mediums together. So only one
USB storage medium must be connected. If two USB storage mediums are
connected, their operation will not be guaranteed.

•USB storage medium equipped with security function, such as fingerprint


attestation function, cannot be used.

TIP USB storage mediums can be connected even if the power to the instrument is
currently ON.

The method of connecting USB storage mediums is the same as that for USB printers.

Refer For the method of connecting USB printers, refer to page 8-16.

Removing

The method of removing USB storage mediums is the same as that for USB printers.

Refer For the method of removing USB printers, refer to page 8-20.

8-21
Chapter 8 USING OPTIONS AND EXTERNAL DEVICES

8.3 Operating the Instrument from a Personal


Computer
By connecting the instrument to a personal computer, the instrument can be operated
from the computer (by sending commands from the computer).
This instrument controlled by following method.

• RS-232C
• GP-IB

8-22
Chapter 8 USING OPTIONS AND EXTERNAL DEVICES

Operation by using RS-232C


Connecting the Instrument to a Personal Computer

Caution The instrument can be connected to a personal computer using a RS-232C cross
cable. Since the instrument has no RS-232C interface, a USB-to-Serial adapter
must be provided by the user.

TIP
•The following USB-to-Serial adapter must be used.

Manufacturer: I-O Data Device, Inc.

Model Name: USB-RSAQ2 or later.

• The wiring diagram of cross cable is as follows.

1. Make sure that the power to both the instrument and computer is turned OFF.

WARNING
Do not connect the computer while the power to the instrument is ON.
Failure to observe this may result in an electric shock.

Refer
For the method of turning OFF the power, refer to page 3-108.

8-23
Chapter 8 USING OPTIONS AND EXTERNAL DEVICES

2. Open the cover on the top of the instrument.

3. Connect the USB connector of the connecting cable to a USB connector (host
side) on the instrument.

TIP
Two USB connectors (host side) are available, and the personal computer can be
connected to either of these.

4. Connect the RS-232C connector of the cable to the personal computer.

8-24
Chapter 8 USING OPTIONS AND EXTERNAL DEVICES

Setting the Instrument

This section explains how to change the communication settings to allow the instrument to
communicate with the personal computer.

1. Turn ON the power to both the instrument and personal computer.

Refer For the method of turning ON the power to the instrument, refer to page 3-3.

Changing the Baud Rate


The baud rate can be changed as explained below.
♦ Example: “9600” → “38400”

2. Press [MODE] to locate the cursor to “SETTING”.

3. Press [F2] (EXTERNAL INSTRUMENT SET).

4. Locate the cursor to “BAUD RATE” by using the rotary knob or the arrow key.

8-25
Chapter 8 USING OPTIONS AND EXTERNAL DEVICES

5. Press [ENTER].
A selection window will appear.

TIP
2400
4800
*9600
Selectable
19200
baud rates
38400
57600
115200

*: Indicates the default setting.

6. Locate the cursor to “38400” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

7. Press [ENTER] to register the change made to the baud rate setting.

Changing the Flow Control Setting


The flow control can be changed as explained below.
♦ Example: “NONE” → ”HARDWARE”

8. Locate the cursor to “FLOW CONTROL” by using the rotary knob or the arrow
key.

8-26
Chapter 8 USING OPTIONS AND EXTERNAL DEVICES

9. Press [ENTER].
A selection window will appear.

TIP
*NONE Disables flow control.
Selectable flow
control settings HARDWARE Uses the flow control setting made on the device (personal
computer) connected to the instrument.
*: Indicates the default setting.

10. Locate the cursor to “HARDWARE” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

11. Press [ENTER] to register the change made to the flow control setting.

Other Settings

Item Setting
Data bits 8 bits (fixed)
Parity None (fixed)
Stop bits 1 bit (fixed)

*: Use “CR” and “LF” for the delimiters.

8-27
Chapter 8 USING OPTIONS AND EXTERNAL DEVICES

Operating the Instrument

The instrument can be operated by entering commands using the personal computer’s
communication software.
This section explains how to operate the instrument using HyperTerminal of Microsoft
Windows2000.

1. Start HyperTerminal.
From the [Start] menu of Windows2000, select [Programs] - [Accessories] -
[Communications] - [HyperTerminal] to start HyperTerminal.

2. Set up HyperTerminal.

Caution •The same settings as those for RS-232C of the instrument must be made for
HyperTerminal.

•The following functions in ASCII Setup must be enabled.

Send line ends with line feeds.

Echo typed characters locally

3. Enter an appropriate command.

8-28
Chapter 8 USING OPTIONS AND EXTERNAL DEVICES

Disconnecting the instrument and the personal computer

1. Make sure that the power to both the instrument and computer is turned OFF.

WARNING
Do not connect the computer while the power to the instrument is ON.
Failure to observe this may result in an electric shock.

Refer
For the method of turning OFF the power, refer to page 3-108.

2. Remove the USB connector of the connecting cable from the instrument.

3. Remove the RS-232C connector of the connecting cable from the personal
computer.

8-29
Chapter 8 USING OPTIONS AND EXTERNAL DEVICES

Operation by using GP-IB


Interface function

This unit has the interface functions shown in Table of the GP-IB interface functions
specified IEEE488.1.

Code Interface function


SH1 All send handshake function
AH1 All receive handshake function
T6 Basic talker and serial pole functions
L4 Basic listener function
SR1 All service request function
RL1 All remote and local function
PP0 Parallel pole function is not provided
DC1 All device clear function
DT1 All device trigger function
C0 Controller function is not provided

Local Lock Out function


When the universal command “LLO” is received in the REMOTE mode, this unit
enters the LLO (local lock out) status. To cancel this status, you must reset the REN
(remote enable) and power OFF instrument, and power it ON again.

Device Clear function


This instrument stops measurement and deletes the displayed trace via “DCL” and
“SDC”.

Device Trigger function


This instrument starts average measurement using “GET”.

8-30
Chapter 8 USING OPTIONS AND EXTERNAL DEVICES

Service Request function


When the service request is valid, the service request signal is transmitted according
to the table below.

Bit Explanation
D8 Always:0
D7 Service request (0:None / 1: exist)
D6 Hardware information (0: normal / 1: abnormal)
D5 Always:0
D4 Always:0
D3 Plug check information (0: normal / 1: abnormal)
D2 Command check (0: Normal / 1: error)
D1 Status of instrument (0: On measurement / 1: No
measurement)

Control command and sent data format


Several control command can be sent in connected form by using “,” for connection.
However, the receive buffer capacity of this equipment is 512 bytes.

8-31
Chapter 8 USING OPTIONS AND EXTERNAL DEVICES

Connecting the Instrument to a Personal Computer

Caution The instrument can be connected to a personal computer using a GP-IB PC card
(PCMCIA) and cable.

TIP Please use following GP-IB cards.

Manufacturer: CONTEC CO., LTD.

Model Name: GP-IB (CB) F

1. Make sure that the power to both the instrument and computer is turned OFF.

Refer
For the method of turning OFF the power, refer to page 3-108.

2. Open the cover on the top of the instrument.

3. Attach GP-IB PC card to this instrument.

Refer
For the procedure of attaching GP-IB card, refer to page 8-13.

4. Connect cable to personal computer.

8-32
Chapter 8 USING OPTIONS AND EXTERNAL DEVICES

Setting the Instrument

This section explains how to change the communication settings to allow the instrument to
communicate with the personal computer.

1. Turn ON the power to both the instrument and personal computer.

Refer For the method of turning ON the power to the instrument, refer to page 3-3.

Change the GP-IB address setting.


GP-IB address can be changed as explained bellow.
♦ Example: “21” → “7”

2. Press [MODE] to locate the cursor to “SETTING”.

3. Press [F2] (EXTERNAL INSTRUMENT SET).

4. Locate the cursor to “GP-IB ADDRESS” by using the rotary knob or the arrow
key.

8-33
Chapter 8 USING OPTIONS AND EXTERNAL DEVICES

5. Press [ENTER].
A selection window will appear.

TIP

Selectable 0

GP-IB to

address 30
(1step)

Default setting: 21

6. Locate the cursor to “7” by using the rotary knob or [S] / [T].

7. Press [ENTER] to register the change made to the GP-IB address setting.

8-34
Chapter 8 USING OPTIONS AND EXTERNAL DEVICES

Operating the Instrument

This instrument can be controlled by entering commands using GP-IB control software of
PC.

1. Start control software.

2. Set the GP-IB address.

Caution GP-IB address of setting is necessary to set same GP-IB address of instrument.

3. Input commands.

8-35
Chapter 8 USING OPTIONS AND EXTERNAL DEVICES

Disconnecting the instrument and the personal computer

1. Make sure that the power to both the instrument and computer is turned OFF.

WARNING
Do not connect the computer while the power to the instrument is ON.
Failure to observe this may result in an electric shock.

Refer
For the method of turning OFF the power, refer to page 3-108.

2. Remove the GP-IB card from the instrument.

3. Remove the cable from the personal computer.

8-36
Chapter 8 USING OPTIONS AND EXTERNAL DEVICES

Control Commands
Device Message
No. Function Numeric Description
Header
Part
1-1 OTDR measurement ST m Starts/stops OTDR measurement.
start/stop m= 0: Stops measurement.
1: Starts real-time measurement.
2: Starts average measurement
(continued).
3: Starts average measurement (new).
1-2 Current average time No control command
1-3 Cursor position CU m Places the cursor at point “m”.
m= SXXXX.XXXXX
“S” indicates a sign. It can be omitted in the case
of “+”.
The distance unit set by command 11-5 will be
applied.
1-4 Magnification ratio for H m Sets the magnification ratio for horizontal axis.
horizontal axis m= −1: 640km 12: (50m)
(During real-time) 0: 240km 13: (25m)
1: 160 km 14: 320km
2: 80 km 15: 2 km
3: 40 km 16: 400 m
4: 20 km 17: 200 m
5: 10 km 18: -
6: 5 km 19: -
7: 2.5 km 20: (100m)
8: 1 km 21: (10m)
9: 500 m 22: (5m)
10: 250 m 23: (2.5m)
11: - 24: -
The values that can be set vary with the distance
range.
1-5 Magnification ratio for HSE m Sets the magnification ratio for horizontal axis.
horizontal axis m= 0: x1 9: 1km
(Not during real-time) 1: 500km 10: 500m
2: 250km 11: 250m
3: 100km 12: 100m
4: 50km 13: 50m
5: 25km 14: 25m
6: 10km 15: 10m
7: 5km 16: 5m
8: 2.5km 17: 2.5m
The values that can be set vary with the distance
range.
1-6 Resolution No control command
1-7 Magnification ratio for V m Sets the magnification ratio for vertical axis.
vertical axis m= 0: 5 dB/div
1: 2 dB/div
2: 1 dB/div
3: 0.5 dB/div
4: 0.2 dB/div
5: 7.5 dB/div

8-37
Chapter 8 USING OPTIONS AND EXTERNAL DEVICES

Device Message
No. Function Numeric Description
Header
Part
1-8 Display start distance HPOS m Sets the display start position for horizontal axis.
m= SXXXX.XXXXX
“S” indicates a sign. It can be omitted in the case
of “+”.
The distance unit set by command 11-5 will be
applied.
The settable range varies with the settings made
by commands 1-4 and 1-5.
1-9 Distance from the origin No control command
1-10 Display start level VPOS m Sets the display start level.
m= SXX.XXX
Reference: 48.160dB (when average method is
selected HI-SPEED)
“S” indicates a sign. It can be omitted in the case
of “+”.
1-11 Trace information No control command
acquisition
1-12 Display scale Initialization I Initializes the display scale.
1-13 Display screen print CPY Prints the currently displayed screen.
Printing will be stopped if this command is
executed during printing.
1-14 Paper feed FED m Feeds the paper by “m” lines (expansion printer
unit).
1 ≤ m ≤ 999:1step
1-15 Magnification ratio for HSP m Sets the magnification ratio for horizontal axis.
horizontal axis m= 0: x1 5: x40 (x50)
(Not during real-time) 1: x2 6: x80 (x100)
Conventional method 2: x4 (x5) 7: x200
3: x8 (x10) 8: x400
refer to page 8-62.
The above values may not be applicable if a value
given in ( ) is set by command 1-4.
2-1 Marker setting M m Sets a marker at the cursor position.
m= 1: 1
2: 2
3: 3
2-2 Auxiliary marker Y m Sets a Y marker at the cursor position.
m= 1: Y1
2: Y2
3: Y3
2-3 Marker delete C Deletes all the markers.
2-4 Cursor delete CC Deletes the cursor.
2-5 Distance reference Sets the distance reference at the cursor position.
REF
setting
2-6 Distance reference delete REC Deletes the distance reference.
2-7 Approximate straight line SF m Shows/hides the approximate straight lines.
m= 0: Hides the approximate straight lines.
1: Shows the approximate straight lines.
2-8 Cursor link CL m Enables (ON)/disables (OFF) the cursor link
function.
m= 0: OFF
1: ON

8-38
Chapter 8 USING OPTIONS AND EXTERNAL DEVICES

Device Message
No. Function Numeric Description
Header
Part
3-1 Label L XXXX Enters the label. Up to 36 characters can be
entered.
The device message must be separated from the
label using a comma “,”.
3-2 Company name CORP XXXX Enters the company name. Up to 36 characters
can be entered.
The device message must be separated from the
company name using a comma “,”.
3-3 Name OP XXXX Enters the name. Up to 36 characters can be
entered.
The device message must be separated from the
company name using a comma “,”.
3-4 Cable ID LCID XXXX Enters the cable ID. Up to 36 characters can be
entered.
The device message must be separated from the
company name using a comma “,”.
3-5 Fiber ID LFID XXXX Enters the fiber ID. Up to 36 characters can be
entered.
The device message must be separated from the
company name using a comma “,”.
3-6 Fiber type FT m Sets the fiber type.
m= 0: SMF
1: DSF
2: NZ-DSF
3: MMF
3-7 Cable code LCCD XXXX Enters the cable code. Up to 36 characters can
be entered.
The device message must be separated from the
company name using a comma “,”.
3-8 Originating location LOL XXXX Enters the originating location. Up to 36
characters can be entered.
The device message must be separated from the
originating location using a comma “,”.
3-9 Terminating location LTL XXXX Enter the terminating location. Up to 36
characters can be entered.
The device message must be separated from the
terminating location using a comma “,”.
3-10 Data flag LCDF m Sets the data flag.
m= 0: -
1: BC (as-Built Condition)
2: RC (as-Repaired Condition)
3: OT (Other)
3-11 Auto increment AI m Enables (ON)/disables (OFF) the LABEL auto
increment function.
m= 0: ON
1: OFF

8-39
Chapter 8 USING OPTIONS AND EXTERNAL DEVICES

Device Message
No. Function Numeric Description
Header
Part
4-1 Wavelength LAM m Sets the measurement wavelength.
m= 0: Unit’s first wavelength
1: Unit’s second wavelength
2: Unit’s third wavelength
3: Unit’s fourth wavelength
The wavelengths that can be set vary with the
optical module used.
When use AQ7269, No.16-5 must be specified in
advance.
MMF 850nm : FMODESET1 => LAM0
MMF 1300nm : FMODESET1 => LAM1
SMF 1310nm : FMODESET0 => LAM2
SMF 1550nm : FMODESET0 => LAM3
4-2 Filter FIL m Enables (ON)/disables (OFF) the filter.
m= 0: OFF
1: ON
4-3 Approximate method LSA m Sets the approximate method.
m= 0: Two point approximate (TPA)
1: Least squares approximate (LSA)
4-4 Plug check PC m Enables (ON)/disables (OFF) the optical plug
connection check.
m= 0: OFF
1: ON
4-5 Measurement condition ASU m Sets the measurement condition automation /
automation / event event detection function.
detection m= 0: Manual
1: Auto range
2: Auto attenuation
3: Auto range + Auto search
4: Auto search
5: Auto attenuation + Auto search
4-6 Distance range R m Sets the distance range.
m= 0: 10 km 5: 240 km 10: 1 km
1: 20 km 6: 5 km
2: 40 km 7: 2 km
3: 80 km 8: 320 km
4: 160 km 9: 640 km
The distance range that can be set varies with the
wavelength to be used.
No.4-1 must be specified in advance.
4-7 Pulse width PW m Sets the pulse width.
m= 0: - 6: 1 μs
1: 10 ns 7: 4 μs
2: 20 ns 8: 10 μs
3: 100 ns 9: 20 μs
4: 200 ns 10: 50 ns
5: 500 ns 11: 50 μs
The pulse width that can be set varies with the
optical module and distance range to be used.
No.4-1, No.4-6 must be specified in advance.

8-40
Chapter 8 USING OPTIONS AND EXTERNAL DEVICES

Device Message
No. Function Numeric Description
Header
Part
4-8 Attenuation AT m Set the attenuation.
m= 0: 0.00 dB 11: 13.75 dB
1: 1.25 dB 12: 15.00 dB
2: 2.50 dB 13: 16.25 dB
3: 3.75 dB 14: 17.50 dB
4: 5.00 dB 15: 18.75 dB
5: 6.25 dB 16: 20.00 dB
6: 7.50 dB 17: 21.25 dB
7: 8.75 dB 18: 22.50 dB
8: 10.00 dB 19: 23.75 dB
9: 11.25 dB 20: 25.00 dB
10: 12.50 dB 21: 26.25 dB
The attenuation that can be set varies with the
pulse width.
No.4-1, No.4-6, No.4-7 must be specified in
advance.
4-9 Average condition AVD m Sets the type of average measurement.
m= 1: Average time (2^*)
2: Average interval
3: Average time (*k)
4-10 Average time /average NUM m Sets the time (interval) for average processing.
interval setting m= −2: 2^10 3: 2^15
−1: 2^11 4: 2^16
0: 2^12 5: 2^17
1: 2^13 6: 2^18
2: 2^14

m= −2: 1k 3: 32 k
−1: 2k 4: 65 k
0: 4k 5: 131k
1: 8k 6: 262k
2: 16k

m= 0: 10seconds 5: 3minutes
1: 20seconds 6: 5minutes
2: 30seconds 7: 10minutes
3: 1minute 8: 20minutes
4: - 9: 30minutes
The average count set by command 4-9 will be
applied.
4-11 Average method AVE m Sets the average method.
m= 0: Hi-SPEED
1: NORMAL
2: Hi-RETURN
4-12 Data size DS m Sets the data size.
m= 0: 5k data
1: 20k data
2: 60k data

8-41
Chapter 8 USING OPTIONS AND EXTERNAL DEVICES

Device Message
No. Function Numeric Description
Header
Part
4-13 Group index IOR m Sets the group index.
1.00000 ≤ m ≤ 1.99999:0.00001step
The group index varies with each wavelength.
If this setting is changed after the interval group
index is set by command 5-11, the interval group
index that is set by command 5-11 will be
invalidated.
4-14 Back scattering ray BS m, n Sets the back scatter level.
(RL) m= 0: Unit’s first wavelength
1: Unit’s second wavelength
2: Unit’s third wavelength
3: Unit’s fourth wavelength
10.00 ≤ n ≤ 64.99:1step
The wavelengths that can be set vary with the
optical module used.
When use AQ7269, No.16-5 must be specified in
advance.
4-15 Measurement condition No control command
output
4-16 Multi wavelength NWAVESET m Sets the multi wavelength measurement.
m= 0 : OFF
measurement setting
1 : ON
4-17 Wavelength setting (for MWAVE m,n,o,p Sets the wavelength.
m= 0 : The first wavelength of the unit is OFF
multi wavelength 1 : The first wavelength og the unit is ON
measurement) n= 0 : The second wavelength of the unit is
OFF
1 : The second wavelength of the unit is ON
o= 0 : The third wavelength of the unit is OFF
1 : The third wavelength of the unit is ON
p= 0 : The fourth wavelength of the unit is OFF
1 : The fourth wavelength of the unit is ON
When use AQ7269, No.16-5 must be specified in
advance.
4-18 Auto saving ASAVE m Sets the auto saving
m= 0 : OFF
1 : ON
5-1 Auto search execution ASE Executes auto search.
5-2 Next event Moves the current event to the next event.
When sets the number at m, the current event
NEX (m) moves specified number event.
m = 001 to 100 (Sets S point and R point = -1,
End point = 0)
5-3 Previous event Moves the current event to the previous event.
When sets the number at m, the current event
PRE (m) moves specified number event.
m = 001 to 100 (Sets S point and R point = -1,
End point = 0)
5-4 Event insert IE Inserts an event at the cursor position.
5-5 Event delete DE (m) Deletes current event.
When sets the number at m, the specified number
event is deleted.
m = 001 to 100 (Sets S point and R point = -1,
End point = 0)

8-42
Chapter 8 USING OPTIONS AND EXTERNAL DEVICES

Device Message
No. Function Numeric Description
Header
Part
5-6 Event marker move ( 1 EM m, n Moves the marker to the cursor position.
to 3 ) m: Set an event No.
(S, R and E point can be set only 2 )
m=000 to 100 (-1 for S or R point, 0 for E point)
n: Marker.
n= 1: 1
2: 2
3: 3
5-7 Event auxiliary marker EY m Moves marker Y2 to the cursor position.
move (Y2) m: Set an event No.
m= 000 to 100
5-8 Event data acquisition No control command
5-9 Event note EN m, n Enters a comment for an event.
m= Event No. (-1 for R point, 0 for E point)
n= Comment (up to 36 characters)
5-10 Event list print PL m Sets the item to be printed.
m= 0: List
1: Trace + List
5-11 Section group index SIORS m, n Sets the section group index.
setting m= Event No. (0 for E point)
1.00000 ≤ n ≤ 1.99999:0.00001step
The settings made here will be discarded if the
group index set by command 4-13 is changed.
5-12 Splice loss threshold SPL m Sets the splice loss threshold.
0.01 ≤ m ≤ 9.99:0.01step
5-13 Return loss threshold BSL m Sets the return loss threshold.
(RSL) 20 ≤ m ≤ 70:1step
5-14 Fiber end threshold EFL m Sets the fiber end threshold.
(BPL) 3 ≤ m ≤ 10:1step
5-15 Fault event show/hide DFE m Shows/hides fault events.
setting m= 0: Shows fault events.
1: Hides fault events.
5-16 Fault event threshold FESL m Sets the splice loss threshold for fault events.
(Splice loss) 0.01 ≤ m ≤ 9.99:0.01step
5-17 Fault event threshold FERL m Sets the return loss threshold for fault events.
(Return loss) 20 ≤ m ≤ 70:1step
5-18 Auto search event count No control command
output
5-19 Auto search result output No control command
5-20 Section analysis start Sets the start point at the cursor position.
SSPOS
point setting
5-21 Section analysis end Sets the end point at the cursor position.
SEPOS
point setting
5-22 Reference return loss AJPOS Sets the cursor position as the reference return
setting loss.
5-23 Section data acquisition No control command

8-43
Chapter 8 USING OPTIONS AND EXTERNAL DEVICES

Device Message
No. Function Numeric Description
Header
Part
6-1 Drive setting FDA m, n Sets the drive and file No.
m= 0: FD (expansion unit)
1: Built-in memory
2: -
3: PCMCIA
4: -
5: USB
n= File name (Max 39 character. excluding file
extension)
6-2 Folder setting DIR m Sets the folder name.
The device message must be separated from the
originating location using a comma “,”
m= Folder name (root folder sets “/”)
example:/aaa/bbb/ccc/ddd/
6-3 File type setting FF m Sets the file type.
m= 0: .TRB 6: .LST
1: - 7: .SOR(Telcordia)
2: .SET 8: .CSV
3: .SOR(Bellcore) 9: .TRD
4: .TIF 10: .TRA
5: .BMP 11: .4
(In file saveing, 3 and 7 will be not made
distinction)
6-4 Recorded capacity No control command
6-5 Recorded file name No control command
6-6 Sub folder check No control command
6-7 Acquisition of file list of No control command
current folder
7-1 File recall FRC Recalls a file.
.BMP, .TIF, .LST, and .CSV files cannot be
recalled.
Drive (6-1), folder (6-2) and file type (6-3) must be
specified in advance.
7-2 File list print FP m, n Prints a list of files.
m: Set the drive.
m= 0: FD (expansion unit)
1: Built-in memory
2: -
3: PCMCIA
4: -
5: USB
n: Set the folder name.
n= Folder name(root folder sets “/”)
example:/aaa/bbb/ccc/ddd/
8-1 Data save FST Saves the data (without overwriting).
Drive (6-1), folder (6-2) and file type (6-3) must be
specified in advance.
8-2 Data overwriting RFS Overwrites the data.
Drive (6-1), folder (6-2) and file type (6-3) must be
specified in advance.
9-1 File delete DEL Deletes the file.
Drive (6-1), folder (6-2) and file type (6-3) must be
specified in advance.

8-44
Chapter 8 USING OPTIONS AND EXTERNAL DEVICES

Device Message
No. Function Numeric Description
Header
Part
10-1 Drive initialize FIN m Initialized the drive.
m= 0: FD (expansion unit)
1: Built-in memory
2: -
3: PCMCIA
4: -
5: -
6: USB
10-2 Copy COPY m, n, o, p, q Sets the copy source file.
If “o” is not specified, copy will be made for each
folder.
m: Set the copy source drive.
m= 0: FD (expansion unit)
1: Built-in memory
2: -
3: PCMCIA
4: -
5: -
6: USB
n: Set the copy source folder.
n= Folder name(root folder sets “/”)
example:/aaa/bbb/ccc/ddd/
o: Set the name of the file to be copied.
o= File name
If “*.SOR” is selected, all the SOR files
present in the copy source folder will be
copied.
p: Set the copy destination drive.
p= 0: FD (expansion unit)
1: Built-in memory
2: -
3: PCMCIA
4: -
5: -
6: USB
q: Set the copy destination folder.
q= Folder name(root folder sets “/”)
example:/aaa/bbb/ccc/ddd/
10-3 Folder make DRM m, n Creates a folder.
m: Set the drive.
m= 0: FD (expansion unit)
1: Built-in memory
2: -
3: PCMCIA
4: -
5: USB
n: Set the folder.
n= Folder name(root folder sets “/”)
example:/aaa/bbb/ccc/ddd/
The characters "¥", "," and "?" cannot be used.
A space cannot be used as the first nor the last
character.

8-45
Chapter 8 USING OPTIONS AND EXTERNAL DEVICES

Device Message
No. Function Numeric Description
Header
Part
10-4 Folder delete DRD m, n Deletes a folder.
m: Set the drive.
m= 0: FD (expansion unit)
1: Built-in memory
2: -
3: PCMCIA
4: -
5: USB
n: Set the folder.
n= Folder name(root folder sets “/”)
example:/aaa/bbb/ccc/ddd/
10-5 Storage media state No control command
11-1 Trace type TRC m Sets the trace display method.
m= 0: Dot
1: Line
11-2 Cursor type CSR m Sets the cursor display method.
Second cursor m= 0: “+” (Second cursor OFF)
1: “|” (Second cursor OFF)
2: “+” (Second cursor ON)
3: “|” (Second cursor ON)
11-3 Grid show/hide setting GD m Shows/hides the grid.
m= 0: Hides the grid.
1: Shows the grid.
11-4 Trace display DOT m Sets the trace display dot method.
m= 0: Decimation
1: Mean
2: Maximum
3: Envelope
11-5 Distance unit DM m Sets the distance unit.
m= 0: km
1: mile
2: kf
This setting is effective for all the distance related
items.
11-6 Distance reference DUO m Sets the type of the distance origin marker.
marker m= 0: Line
1: Arrow
11-7 dB digit FIG m Sets the number of display digits for intensity
level.
m= 0: ∗∗.∗∗∗
1: ∗∗.∗∗
2: ∗∗.∗
11-8 Display color DIS m Sets the display color.
m= 0: Color 1
1: Color 2
2: Color 3
3: B&W

8-46
Chapter 8 USING OPTIONS AND EXTERNAL DEVICES

Device Message
No. Function Numeric Description
Header
Part
11-9 Date display format DTE m Sets the date display format.
m= 0: Not displayed
1: APR. 30. 2004
2: 30. APR. 2004
3: 2004. APR. 30
4: 4. 30. 2004
5: 30. 4. 2004
6: 2004. 4. 30
11-10 Year correction YEA m Corrects the year (4-digit).
1970 ≤ m ≤ 2037:1step
11-11 Month correction MTH m Corrects the month.
01 ≤ m ≤ 12:1step
11-12 Day correction DAY m Corrects the day.
m=01 to 31:1step
11-13 Hour correction HOU m Corrects the hour.
m=00 to 23:1step
11-14 Minute correction MIN m Corrects the minute.
m=00 to 59:1step
11-15 Alarm sound setting BEEP m Enables/disables the alarm.
m= 0: Disables the alarm.
1: Enables the alarm.
11-16 Power save setting POW m Sets the power save function.
m= 0: OFF
1: 30sec
2: 1min
3: 3min
4: 5min
5: 10min
6: 20min
11-17 LCD brightness setting BRI m Sets the LCD brightness.
m= 0: Bright
1: Normal
2: Dark
11-18 PCMCIA cancel PCME Shuts off the power to the PCMCIA card.
11-19 Print direction setting PRD m Sets the print direction.
m= 0: Horizontal
1: Vertical
2: Screen
11-20 Print color setting PRIC m Sets the print color.
m= 0: Display
1: B&W
This setting is effective only if “USB” is set by
command 13-1.
12-1 Printer setting PRO m Sets the printer port.
m= 0: Expansion unit
1: -
2: -
3: -
4: -
5: USB(HP)
6: USB(EPSON)
12-2 Printer status check No control command
12-3 RS-232C setting No control command

8-47
Chapter 8 USING OPTIONS AND EXTERNAL DEVICES

Device Message
No. Function Numeric Description
Header
Part
12-4 Setting the USB printer PRIM m Sets the model name of the USB printer.
model name USB(HP)
m= 0: Deskjet5160
1: Deskjet5740
2: Deskjet5168
3: Deskjet5748
USB(EPSON)
0: PX-V500
1: Style C45
Valid only when USB has been selected in
No.12-1.
13-1 Trace data quantity No control command
13-2 Trace data (ASCII) No control command
13-3 Trace data (binary) No control command
13-4 Displayed trace data No control command
(ASCII)
13-5 Displayed trace data No control command
(binary)
13-6 Acquisition of file size No control command
13-7 Acquisition of file No control command
13-8 Sends file PC to OTDR FILESEND m,n,o,p
m: received drive.
m= 0 : FD(EXTENSION UNIT)
1 : INTERNAL MEMORY
2: -
3 : PCMCIA
4: -
5 : USB
n: received folder
o: file name
p: byte number of send file

After send this command, sent binary data is


stored specified file.
example
FILESEND1,/,test.trb,1000
14-1 Instrument status No control command
14-2 Instrument information No control command
14-3 Initialization SETINI Returns the set values of the equipment to the
factory default settings.
However, the following items are not initialized.
External instrument setup(GP-IB address, etc.)
Language
Date
Internal memory
14-4 Device clear DCL Stops measurement and deletes displayed trace.
15-1 Service request setting SRQ m Sets the service request
m= 0 : OFF
1 : ON
16-1 *OTDR/Light source OPMOD m Selects OTDR mode or light source mode
m= 0 : OTDR
mode select
1 : Light source
When using the optical module does not support
light source function, Light source mode can not
be selected.
When changing the mode, optical output is
stopped.

8-48
Chapter 8 USING OPTIONS AND EXTERNAL DEVICES

Device Message
No. Function Numeric Description
Header
Part
16-2 *Light source setting ILS m Sets the light ON/OFF
m= 0 : OFF
1 : ON
This command is valid at light source mode.
16-3 *Modulated frequency of ILM m Selects modulated frequency of light source
m= 0 : CW
light source
1 : 270Hz
2 : 1kHz
3 : 2kHz
This command is valid at light source mode.
16-4 *Light source wavelength LSWL m Selects light source wavelength
m= 0 : The first wavelength of the first
1 : The second wavelength of the unit
2 : The third wavelength of the unit
3 : The fourth wavelength of the unit
Number of wavelength depends on the unit.
This command is valid at light source mode.
16-5 Switching the optical FMODESET m Switches the optical module.
m= 0 : SMF
module
1 : MMF
Valid only when the AQ7269 Module is used.
Sends the following commands after it waits for 5
seconds when you switch the fiber module by this
command.

*: The instrument cannot be used as a light source if an optical module (AQ7261/AQ7269) is installed.

8-49
Chapter 8 USING OPTIONS AND EXTERNAL DEVICES

Request Commands
Return value
No. Function Command Description
format
1-1 OTDR STR m Requests the measurement status.
measurement m=0: Stops measurement.
start/stop 1: Starts real-time measurement.
2: Starts average measurement (continued).
3: Starts average measurement (new).
4: Starts multi wavelength measurement
1-2 Current average TIMR m Requests the time (interval) for average
time processing.
m= −2: 2^10 3: 2^15
−1: 2^11 4: 2^16
0: 2^12 5: 2^17
1: 2^13 6: 2^18
2: 2^14

−2: 1k 3: 32 k
−1: 2k 4: 65 k
0: 4k 5: 131k
1: 8k 6: 262k
2: 16k

0: 10seconds 5: 3minutes
1: 20seconds 6: 5minutes
2: 30seconds 7: 10minutes
3: 1minute 8: 20minutes
4: - 9: 30minutes
1-3 Cursor position CUR SXXXX.XXXXXTT Requests the cursor position.
“S” indicates a sign.
“TT” indicates the
distance unit.
1-4 Magnification ratio HR m Requests the magnification ratio for horizontal
for horizontal axis axis.
(During real-time) m= -1:640km 12: (50m)
0: 240km 13: (25m)
1: 160 km 14: 320km
2: 80 km 15: 2 km
3: 40 km 16: 400 m
4: 20 km 17: 200 m
5: 10 km 18: -
6: 5 km 19: -
7: 2.5 km 20: (100m)
8: 1 km 21: (10m)
9: 500 m 22: (5m)
10: 250 m 23: (2.5m)
11: - 24: -

8-50
Chapter 8 USING OPTIONS AND EXTERNAL DEVICES

Return value
No. Function Command Description
format
1-5 Magnification ratio HSER m Requests the magnification ratio for horizontal
for horizontal axis axis.
(Not during m= 0: x1 9: 1km
real-time) 1: 500km 10: 500m
2: 250km 11: 250m
3: 100km 12: 100m
4: 50km 13: 50m
5: 25km 14: 25m
6: 10km 15: 10m
7: 5km 16: 5m
8: 2.5km 17: 2.5m
1-6 Resolution RESOR XXXXTT Requests the sampling resolution.
“TT” indicates the
distance unit.
1-7 Magnification ratio VR m Requests the magnification ratio for vertical
for vertical axis axis.
m= 0: 5 dB/div
1: 2 dB/div
2: 1 dB/div
3: 0.5 dB/div
4: 0.2 dB/div
5: 7.5 dB/div
1-8 Display start HPOSR SXXXX.XXXXXTT Sets the display start position for horizontal
distance “S” indicates a sign. axis.
“TT” indicates the
distance unit.
1-9 Distance from the DU SXXXX.XXXXXTT Requests the distance from the origin.
origin “S” indicates a sign.
“TT” indicates the
distance unit.
1-10 Display start level VPOSR SXX.XXX Requests the display start level.

1-11 Trace information MD refer to page 8-63. Requests the trace information.
acquisition
1-12 Display scale No request command
Initialization
1-13 Display screen No request command
print
1-14 Paper feed No request command
1-15 Magnification ratio HSPR m Requests the magnification ratio for horizontal
for horizontal axis axis.
(Not during m= 0: x1 5: x40 (x50)
real-time) 1: x2 6: x80 (x100)
Conventional 2: x4 (x5) 7: x200
method 3: x8 (x10) 8: x400
refer to page 8-62.
2-1 Marker position MR m Requests the marker position.
refer to page 8-63. m= 1: 1
2: 2
3: 3
2-2 Auxiliary marker YR m Requests the Y marker position.
position refer to page 8-63. m= 1: Y1
2: Y2
3: Y3
2-3 Marker delete No request command
2-4 Cursor delete No request command

8-51
Chapter 8 USING OPTIONS AND EXTERNAL DEVICES

Return value
No. Function Command Description
format
2-5 Distance origin REFR SXXXX.XXXXXTT Requests the distance origin position.
setting “S” indicates a sign.
“TT” indicates the
distance unit.
2-6 Distance origin No request command
delete
2-7 Approximate SFR m Requests the approximate straight line display
straight line status.
m= 0: Not displayed
1: Displayed
2-8 Cursor link CLR m Requests the cursor link status.
m= 0: OFF
1: ON
3-1 Label LR XXXX xxx Requests the label.
3-2 Company name CORPR XXXX xxx Requests the company name.
3-3 Name OPR XXXX xxx Requests the name.
3-4 Cable ID LCIDR XXXX xxx Requests the cable ID.
3-5 Fiber ID LFIDR XXXX xxx Requests the fiber ID.
3-6 Fiber type FTR m Requests the fiber type.
m= 0: SMF
1: DSF
2: NZ-DSF
3: MMF
3-7 Cable code LCCDR XXXX xxx Requests the cable code.
3-8 Originating LOLR XXXX xxx Requests the originating location.
location
3-9 Terminating LTLR XXXX xxx Requests the terminating location
location
3-10 Data flag LCDFR m Requests the data flag.
m= 0: -
1: BC (as-Built Condition)
2: RC (as-Repaired Condition)
3: OT (Other)
3-11 Auto increment AIR m Requests the LABEL auto increment status.
m= 0: ON
1: OFF
4-1 Wavelength LAMR m Requests the measurement wavelength.
m= 0: Unit’s first wavelength
1: Unit’s second wavelength
2: Unit’s third wavelength
3: Unit’s fourth wavelength
4-2 Filter FILR m Requests the filter status.
m= 0: OFF
1: ON
4-3 Approximate LSAR m Requests the currently used approximate
method method.
m= 0: Two point approximate (TPA)
1: Least squares approximate (LSA)
4-4 Plug check PCR m Requests the optical plug status.
m= 0: OFF
1: ON

8-52
Chapter 8 USING OPTIONS AND EXTERNAL DEVICES

Return value
No. Function Command Description
format
4-5 Measurement ASUR m Requests the measurement condition
condition automation / event detection function.
automation / m= 0: Manual
event detection 1: Auto range
2: Auto attenuation
3: Auto range + Auto search
4: Auto search
5: Auto attenuation + Auto search
4-6 Distance range RR m Requests the distance range.
m= 0: 10 km 5: 240 km 10: 1 km
1: 20 km 6: 5 km
2: 40 km 7: 2 km
3: 80 km 8: 320 km
4: 160 km 9: 640 km
4-7 Pulse width PWR m Requests the pulse width.
m= 0: - 6: 1 μs
1: 10 ns 7: 4 μs
2: 20 ns 8: 10 μs
3: 100 ns 9: 20 μs
4: 200 ns 10: 50 ns
5: 500 ns 11: 50 μs
4-8 Attenuation ATR m Requests the attenuation.
m= 0: 0.00 dB 11: 13.75 dB
1: 1.25 dB 12: 15.00 dB
2: 2.50 dB 13: 16.25 dB
3: 3.75 dB 14: 17.50 dB
4: 5.00 dB 15: 18.75 dB
5: 6.25 dB 16: 20.00 dB
6: 7.50 dB 17: 21.25 dB
7: 8.75 dB 18: 22.50 dB
8: 10.00 dB 19: 23.75 dB
9: 11.25 dB 20: 25.00 dB
10: 12.50 dB 21: 26.25 dB
4-9 Average condition AVDR m Requests the type of average measurement.
m= 1: Average time (2^*)
2: Average interval
3: Average time (*k)
4: Auto

8-53
Chapter 8 USING OPTIONS AND EXTERNAL DEVICES

Return value
No. Function Command Description
format
4-10 Average time NUMR m Requests the time (interval) for average
/average interval processing.
setting m= −2: 2^10 3: 2^15
−1: 2^11 4: 2^16
0: 2^12 5: 2^17
1: 2^13 6: 2^18
2: 2^14

−2: 1k 3: 32 k
−1: 2k 4: 65 k
0: 4k 5: 131k
1: 8k 6: 262k
2: 16k

0: 10seconds 5: 3minutes
1: 20seconds 6: 5minutes
2: 30seconds 7: 10minutes
3: 1minutes 8: 20minutes
4: - 9: 30minutes
4-11 Average method AVER m Requests the average method.
m= 0: Hi-SPEED
1: NORMAL
2: Hi-RETURN
4-12 Data size DSR m Requests the data size.
m= 0: 5k data
1: 20k data
2: 60k data
4-13 Group index IORR 1.XXXXX Requests the group index.

4-14 Back scattering BSR m, n Requests the back scatter level.


ray (RLR) m= 0: Unit’s first wavelength
1: Unit’s second wavelength
2: Unit’s third wavelength
3: Unit’s fourth wavelength
n= : The back scatter level. 10.00 – 64.99
4-15 Measurement U refer to page 8-63. Requests the measurement conditions.
condition output
4-16 Multi wavelength NWAVESETR m Requires multi wavelength measurement
setting
measurement
m= 0 : OFF
setting 1 : ON
4-17 Multi wavelength MWAVER m, n, o, p Requires wavelength setting.
Return value formant : m,n,o,p
measurement m= 0: The first wavelength of the unit is OFF
setting 1: The first wavelength of the unit is ON
n= 0: The second wavelength of the unit is
OFF
1: The second wavelength of the unit is
ON
o= 0: The third wavelength of the unit is OFF
1: The third wavelength of the unit is ON
p= 0: The fourth wavelength of the unit is
OFF
1: The fourth wavelength of the unit is
ON
4-18 Auto saving ASAVER m Requires auto saving condition.
m= 0 : OFF
condition
1 : ON

8-54
Chapter 8 USING OPTIONS AND EXTERNAL DEVICES

Return value
No. Function Command Description
format
5-1 Auto search No request command
execution
5-2 Next event No request command
5-3 Previous event No request command
5-4 Event insert No request command
5-5 Event delete No request command
5-6 Event marker EMR m, n Requests the event marker position.
position ( 1 to refer to page 8-63. m: Set the event No.
3 )
(-1 for S or R point, 0 for E point)
n: Set the marker:
(S, R and E point can be set only 2 )
n= 1: 1
2: 2
3: 3
5-7 Event auxiliary EYR m Requests the event marker Y2 position.
maker position refer to page 8-63. m: Set an event No.
(Y2)
5-8 Event data EDR m Acquires event data.
acquisition refer to page 8-64. m: Set an event No. (-1 for R point, 0 for E
point).
5-9 Event note ENR m Requests the event comment.
m: Set an event No. (-1 for R point, 0 for E
point).
5-10 Event list print No request command
5-11 Section group SIORSR m Requests the group index for each section.
index setting m: Set an event No. (R for R point).
1.XXXXX
5-12 Splice loss SPLR X.XX Requests the splice loss threshold.
threshold
5-13 Return loss BSLR XX Requests the return loss threshold.
threshold (RSLR)
5-14 Fiber end EFLR XX Requests the fiber end threshold.
threshold (BPLR) (XX.X)
5-15 Fault event DFER m Requests the fault event display setting.
show/hide setting m= 0: Displayed
1: Not displayed
5-16 Fault event FESLR X.XX Requests the splice loss threshold for fault
threshold events.
(Splice loss)
5-17 Fault event FERLR XX Requests the return loss threshold for fault
threshold events.
(Return loss)
5-18 Auto search event SPPR XXX Requests the number of events detected by
count output auto search.
(R point is included, END point is not included)
5-19 Auto search result SPDR refer to page 8-64. Requests the auto search results.
output
5-20 Section analysis SSPOSR SXXXX.XXXXXTT Requests the section start position.
start point setting “S” indicates a sign.
“TT” indicates the
distance unit.
5-21 Section analysis SEPOSR SXXXX.XXXXXTT Requests the section end position.
end point setting “S” indicates a sign.
“TT” indicates the
distance unit.

8-55
Chapter 8 USING OPTIONS AND EXTERNAL DEVICES

Return value
No. Function Command Description
format
5-22 Reference return AJPOSR SXXXX.XXXXXTT Requests the reference value.
loss setting “S” indicates a sign.
“TT” indicates the
distance unit.
5-23 Section data SDR refer to page 8-64. Requests the section loss and section return
acquisition loss.
6-1 Drive setting FDAR m, n Requests the drive name (m) and file name
(n).
Return value format: m,n
m= 0: FD (expansion unit)
1: Built-in memory
2: -
3: PCMCIA
4: -
5: USB
n= File name
If the set drive does not exist, the drive is
changed to "Built-in memory" and the folder is
changed to "/".
6-2 Folder setting DIRR XXXX xxx Requests the folder name.
If the set drive or folder does not exist, "?" is
returned.
6-3 File type setting FFR m Requests the file type.
m= 0: .TRB 6: .LST
1: - 7: .SOR(Telcordia)
2: .SET 8: .CSV
3: .SOR(Bellcore) 9: .TRD
4: .TIF 10: .TRA
5: .BMP 11: .4
6-4 Recorded FSR m Requests the used capacity of the drive.
capacity m: Specify the drive.
m= 0: FD (expansion unit)
1: Built-in memory
2: -
3: PCMCIA
4: -
5: USB
XXXXXXXXXXbyte
If there is no drive, "?" is returned.

8-56
Chapter 8 USING OPTIONS AND EXTERNAL DEVICES

Return value
No. Function Command Description
format
6-5 Recorded file FAR m, n, o Request the names of recorded files.
name Return value format:
XXXXXXX,XXXXXXX, xxx
m: Specify the drive.
m= 0: FD (expansion unit)
1: Built-in memory
2: -
3: PCMCIA
4: -
5: USB
n: Specify the folder.
o: Specify the file type.
o= 0: .TRB 6: .LST
1: - 7: .SOR(Telcordia)
2: .SET 8: .CSV
3: .SOR(Bellcore) 9: .TRD
4: .TIF 10: .TRA
5: .BMP 11: .4
If the set drive or folder does not exist, "?" is
returned.
6-6 Sub folder check SDIRR XXXXXXX, Requests the sub folders of the current folder.
XXXXXXX, xxx None will be returned if no sub folders exist.
If the set drive or folder does not exist, "?" is
returned.
6-7 Acquisition of file CUDIR Requires file list of folder selected FDA or DIR.
Each file names which separated by “,” are
list of current
output. Folder names are separated by “/”.
folder Example
001.SOR,abc/
If the set drive or folder does not exist, "?" is
returned.
7-1 File recall No request command
7-2 File list print No request command
8-1 Data save No request command
8-2 Data overwriting No request command
9-1 File delete No request command
10-1 Drive initialize No request command
10-3 Folder make No request command
10-4 Folder delete No request command
10-5 Storage media FERR m Requests the storage media status.
state m= 0: Normal
1: -
2: No storage media is installed.
3: Not initialized
4: Writing inhibited
5: Selected not stored file
6: Selected stored file
7: Not enough media capacity
8: Other error
11-1 Trace type TRCR m Requests the trace display method.
m= 0: Dot
1: Line

8-57
Chapter 8 USING OPTIONS AND EXTERNAL DEVICES

Return value
No. Function Command Description
format
11-2 Cursor type CSRR m Requests the cursor display method.
Second cursor m= 0: “+” (Second cursor OFF)
1: “|” (Second cursor OFF)
2: “+” (Second cursor ON)
3: “|” (Second cursor ON)
11-3 Grid show/hide GDR m Requests to show/hide the grid.
setting m= 0: Hides the grid.
1: Shows the grid.
11-4 Trace display DOTR m Requests the trace display dot method.
m= 0: Decimation
1: Mean
2: Maximum
3: Envelope
11-5 Distance unit DMR m Requests the distance unit.
m= 0: km
1: mile
2: kf
11-6 Distance DUOR m Requests the type of the distance reference
reference marker marker.
m= 0: Line
1: Arrow
11-7 dB digit FIGR m Requests the number of display digits for
intensity level.
m= 0: ∗∗.∗∗∗
1: ∗∗.∗∗
2: ∗∗.∗
11-8 Display color DISR m Requests the display color.
m= 0: Color 1
1: Color 2
2: Color 3
3: B&W
11-9 Date display DTER m Requests the date display format.
format m= 0: Not displayed
1: Apr. 30. 2004
2: 30. Apr. 2004
3: 2004. Apr. 30
4: 4. 30. 2004
5: 30. 4. 2004
6: 2004. 4. 30
11-10 Year correction YEAR m Requests the year.
11-11 Month correction MTHR m Requests the month.
11-12 Day correction DAYR m Requests the day.
11-13 Hour correction HOUR m Requests the hour.
11-14 Minute correction MINR m Requests the minute.
11-15 Alarm sound BEEPR m Requests to enable.disable the alarm.
setting m= 0: Disables the alarm.
1: Enables the alarm.
11-16 Power save POWR m Requests the power save function.
setting m= 0: OFF
1: 30sec
2: 1min
3: 3min
4: 5min
5: 10min
6: 20min

8-58
Chapter 8 USING OPTIONS AND EXTERNAL DEVICES

Return value
No. Function Command Description
format
11-17 LCD brightness BRIR m Requests the LCD brightness.
setting m= 0: Bright
1: Normal
2: Dark
11-18 PCMCIA cancel No request command
11-19 Print direction PRDR m Requests the print direction.
setting m= 0: Horizontal
1: Vertical
2: Screen
11-20 Print color setting PRICR m Requests the print color.
m= 0: Display
1: B&W
12-1 Printer setting PROR m Requests the printer port.
m= 0: Expansion unit
1: -
2: -
3: -
4: -
5: USB(HP)
6:USB(EPSON)
12-2 Printer status PRSR m Requests the printer status.
check (CPYR) m= 0: Print ready
1: Print in progress
2: No paper
3: Head up
4: Abnormal temperature
This command cannot be used in the case of
USB printer.
12-3 RS-232C setting RSR m, n, o, p, q Requests the RS-232C parameters.
Return value format: m,n,o,p,q
m: Baud rate
0: 300 5: 9600
1: 600 6: 19200
2: 1200 7: 38400
3: 2400 8: 57600
4: 4800 9: 115200
n: Data bits
o: Parity
0: None
p: Stop bits 0 1bit
q: Flow control
0:-
1: Hardware
2: None
12-4 Setting the model PRIMR m Requests the model name of the USB printer.
name of the USB USB(HP)
printer m= 0: Deskjet5160
1: Deskjet5740
2: Deskjet5168
3: Deskjet5748
USB(EPSON)
0: PX-V500
1: Style C45
13-1 Trace data DNR m Requests the number of the trace data.
quantity

8-59
Chapter 8 USING OPTIONS AND EXTERNAL DEVICES

Return value
No. Function Command Description
format
13-2 Trace data DR XX.XXX, XX.XXX, Requests all the trace data (ASCII).
(ASCII) xxx
Unit is dB.
13-3 Trace data DABIR D0D1D2xxxDn EOI Requests all the trace data (binary).
(Binary) The upper and
lower bytes of the
integral part (data ×
1000) will be output
alternately.(0.001dB
unit)
13-4 Display trace data WR XX.XXX,XX.XXX, Requests the trace data (ASCII) for each
(ASCII) xxx displayed trace.
example 45.000dB
is 45000
13-5 Display trace data WABIR D0D1D2xxxDn EOI Requests the trace data (binary) for each
(Binary) The upper and displayed trace.
lower bytes of the As the return values,
integral part (data ×
1000) will be output
alternately.(0.001dB
unit)
13-6 File size FILESR The file size specified by control commands
acquisition 6-1, 6-2 and 6-3 will be requested.
13-7 File acquisition FILER Binary data will be The file size specified by control commands
output continuously. 6-1, 6-2 and 6-3 will be requested.
OTDR data file can be created by storing the
returned values in the order they are received.
This command must be used in conjunction
with command 13-6 (File size acquisition).

13-8 Send file No request command


13-9 Trace data DBIR D0D1D2xxxDn EOI
(binary) the upper and lower
bytes of the integral
part (data × 1000) Requests all the trace data (binary).
will be output
alternately.(0.004dB
unit)
13-10 Displayed trace WBIR D0D1D2xxxDn EOI
data the upper and lower
(binary) bytes of the integral
Requests the trace data (binary) for each
part (data × 1000) displayed trace.
will be output
alternately.(0.004dB
unit)

8-60
Chapter 8 USING OPTIONS AND EXTERNAL DEVICES

Return value
No. Function Command Description
format
14-1 Instrument status INFR m Requests the instrument status.
m= 0: Instrument is in standby.
1: Pulse light is currently emitted.
2: -
3: -
4: No printer paper
5: -
6: No optical fiber connected
7: Plug check error
8: In state of alarm
Priority order: 8>7>6>4>1>0
14-2 Instrument IDER refer to page 8-64. Requests the instrument information.
information
14-3 Device clear No request command
14-4 Initialization No request command
15-1 SRQ setting SRQR m Requires service request setting
m= 0 : OFF
1 : ON
16-1 OTDR/Light OPMODR m Requires measurement mode
source m= 0 : OTDR
mode select 1 : Light source
16-2 Light source ILSR m Requires light source status
m= 0 : OFF
status
1 : ON
This command is valid at light source mode.
16-3 Modulated ILMR m Requires modulated frequency of light source
m= 0 : CW
frequency of light
1 : 270Hz
source 2 : 1kHz
3 : 2kHz
This command is valid at light source mode.
16-4 Light source LSWLR m Requires wavelength of light source.
wavelength m= 0 : The first wavelength of the first
1 : The second wavelength of the unit
2 : The third wavelength of the unit
3 : The fourth wavelength of the unit
Number of wavelength depends on the unit.
This command is valid at light source mode.
16-5 Checking the FMODESETR m Requests the state of the optical module.
m= 0 : SMF
optical module
1 : MMF
Valid only when the AQ7269 Module is used.

8-61
Chapter 8 USING OPTIONS AND EXTERNAL DEVICES

HSP command

・Data size: 20k mode / 60k mode

Range of data acquisition


640km 320km 240km 160km
AQ7260 AQ7250 AQ7260 AQ7250 AQ7260 AQ7250 AQ7260 AQ7250
HSP0 640km 320km 320km 240km 240km 160km 160km
HSP1 500km 250km 160km 100km 120km 100km 80km
HSP2 250km 100km 80km 50km 60km 50km 40km
HSP3 100km 50km 40km 25km 30km 25km 20km
HSP4 50km 25km 16km 10km 12km 10km 8km
HSP5 25km 10km 8km 5km 6km 5km 4km
HSP6 10km 5km 4km 2.5km 3km 2.5km 2km
HSP7 5km 2.5km 1.6km 1km 1.2km 1km 800m
HSP8 2.5km 1km 800m 500m 600m 500m 400m

Range of data acquisition


80km 40km 20km 10km 
AQ7260 AQ7250 AQ7260 AQ7250 AQ7260 AQ7250 AQ7260 AQ7250
HSP0 80km 80km 40km 40km 20km 20km 10km 10km
HSP1 50km 40km 25km 20km 10km 10km 5km 5km
HSP2 25km 20km 10km 10km 5km 5km 2.5km 2.5km
HSP3 10km 10km 5km 5km 2.5km 2.5km 1km 1.25km
HSP4 5km 4km 2.5km 2km 1km 1km 500m 500m
HSP5 2.5km 2km 1km 1km 500m 500m 250m 250m
HSP6 1km 1km 500m 500m 250m 250m 100m 125m
HSP7 500m 400m 250m 200m 100m 100m 50m 50m
HSP8 250m 200m 100m 100m 50m 50m

・Data size: 5k mode

Range of data acquisition


640km 320km 240km 160km 80km
AQ7260 AQ7250 AQ7260 AQ7250 AQ7260 AQ7250 AQ7260 AQ7250 AQ7260 AQ7250
HSP0 640km 320km 320km 240km 240km 160km 160km 80km 80km
HSP1 500km 250km 160km 100km 120km 100km 80km 50km 40km
HSP2 250km 100km 62km 50km 48km 50km 32km 25km 16km
HSP3 100km 50km 32km 25km 24km 25km 16km 11km 8km
HSP4 50km 25km 16km 10km 12km 11km 8km 5km 4km
HSP5 25km 10km 6.2km 5km 4.8km 5km 3.2km 2.5km 1.6km
HSP6 10km 5km 3.2km 2.5km 2.4km 2.5km 1.6km 1km 800m

Range of data acquisition


40km 20km 10km 5km 2.5km
AQ7260 AQ7250 AQ7260 AQ7250 AQ7260 AQ7250 AQ7260 AQ7250 AQ7260 AQ7250
HSP0 40km 40km 20km 20km 10km 10km 5km 5km 2.5km 2.5km
HSP1 25km 20km 10km 10km 5km 5km 2.5km 2.5km 1km 1.25km
HSP2 10km 8km 5km 4km 2.5km 2km 1km 1km 500m 500m
HSP3 5km 4km 2.5km 2km 1km 1km 500m 500m 250m 250m
HSP4 2.5km 2km 1km 1km 500m 500m 250m 250m 100m 125m
HSP5 1km 800m 500m 400m 250m 200m 100m 100m 50m 50m
HSP6 500m 400m 250m 200m 100m 100m 50m 50m 25m 25m

・Dist. Range: 2km

Range of data acquisition


2km 1km 400m 200m 100m
AQ7260 AQ7250 AQ7260 AQ7250 AQ7260 AQ7250 AQ7260 AQ7250 AQ7260 AQ7250
HSP0 2km 2km 1km 1km 400m 400m 200m 200m 100m 100m
HSP1 1km 1km 500m 500m 250m 200m 100m 100m 50m 50m
HSP2 500m 500m 250m 250m 100m 100m 50m 50m 25m 25m
HSP3 250m 250m 100m 125m 50m 50m 25m 25m 10m 12.5m
HSP4 100m 100m 50m 50m 25m 20m 10m 10m 5m 5m
HSP5 50m 50m 25m 25m 10m 10m 5m 5m 2.5m 2.5m

8-62
Chapter 8 USING OPTIONS AND EXTERNAL DEVICES

Return Value Format


MD

Return values are separated by a delimiter for each item.


In the case of RS-232C: Output for all the items at once (separated by “,” for each
item).
So, the delimiters (CR and LF) are provided only at the end.
In the case of GP-IB: Created by dividing the return value for each item using the
delimiters (CR and LF), and outputting the items one after
another.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 2122 23 24 25 Remarks:
C U R S O R S X X X X . X X X X X T T CR LF Cursor position
P O S I T I O N S X X X X . X X X X X T T CR LF Left-end position on screen
S P L I C E L O S S S X X . X X X D B CR LF Insertion loss
1 - 2 L O S S S X X . X X X D B CR LF TPA loss between 1 and 2 (*1)
U N I T L O S S A S X X . X X X D B /T T CR LF
L O S S A S X X . X X X D B CR LF
D I S T A N C E A X X X X . X X X X X T T CR LF
U N I T L O S S B S X X . X X X D B /T T CR LF
L O S S B S X X . X X X D B CR LF
D I S T A N C E B X X X X . X X X X X T T CR LF
I O R 1 X X X X X CR LF
R E F X X X X . X X X X X T T CR LF
A P P R O X I M A T I O N X X X CR LF
R E T U R N L O S S S X X . X X X D B CR LF

*1: If markers 1, 2, and 3 have been set, ”1-3 LOSS” is displayed.

MR, YR, EMR, EYR

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
MR M A R K E R M , S X X X X . X X X X X T T S X X . X X X D B CR LF
YR Y m , S X X X X . X X X X X T T S X X . X X X D B CR LF
EMR M A R K E R M , S X X X X . X X X X X T T , S X X . X X X D B CR LF
EYR Y m S X X X X . X X X X X T T , S X X . X X X D B CR LF

The numeric part for each item is right aligned and displayed.
In the case of multi-mode fiber, “SM” will be replaced by “MM”.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
S M X . X X U M , R A N G E X X X T T , P U L S E W I
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
D T H X X X X X X , A T T X X . X X D B , R E S X X X
61 62 63 64 65 66
X X T T CR LF

8-63
Chapter 8 USING OPTIONS AND EXTERNAL DEVICES

EDR

The numeric part for each item is left aligned and displayed, with the unit part at the fixed
position.
Items are displayed in the order “event No.”, “distance”, “splice loss”, “return loss”,
“cumulative loss”, “dB/km” and “event type”.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
X X X , S X X X X . X X X X X T T , S X X . X X X D B , S X
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
X . X X X D B , S X X . X X X D B , S X X . X X X D B / T T
61 62 63 64 65 66
, S X CR LF

SPDR

EDR is output in the event order, separated by a delimiter.


It is output for each event sequentially, finally followed by the END event. The format for
END event is given below.
For the format for each event, refer to “EDR” since it is the same as that for EDR.
In the case of RS-232C: All the events are output at once, with each event separated by a
comma (,).
In the case of GP-IB: Created by dividing the return value for each item using the
delimiters (CR and LF), and outputting the items one after
another.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
E N D , S X X X X . X X X X X T T , S X
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
X . X X X D B , S X X . X X X D B , S X X . X X X D B / T T
61 62 63 64 65 66
, S X CR LF

SDR

Data is output in the order of “interval distance”, “interval loss” and “interval return loss”.
The numeric part is left aligned and displayed, with the unit part at the fixed position.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
S X X X X . X X X X X T T , S X X . X X X D B , S X X . X X
31 32 33 34 35
X D B CR LF

IDER

Data is output in the order of “company name”, “instrument’s model name (S/N)”, “optical
module’s model name (S/N)” and “software version”, with each item separated by a
comma (,).

8-64
Chapter 8 USING OPTIONS AND EXTERNAL DEVICES

Command Input Examples (RS-232C)


This section explains how to enter commands to operate the instrument using
HyperTerminal of Microsoft Windows2000.

Caution When sending commands using HyperTerminal, command codes are sent from the
personal computer to the instrument, one key input at a time. As a result, the
device message cannot be recognized correctly if two or more seconds are spaced
between key inputs.

*: Use “CR” and “LF” for the delimiters.

Setting measurement conditions


• Set “80km” distance range. :R3ENTER
• Set “100ns” pulse width. :PW3ENTER
• Set “3min” average interval. :NUM5ENTER
• Set “High return loss average”. :AVE2ENTER
• Set “80km” distance range. :R3ENTER

Starting measurement
• Real-time measurement :ST1ENTER
• Average measurement (new) :ST3ENTER

Checking measurement status


:STR1ENTER
Return value :0 (measurement halted), 1 to 3 (measurement in
progress)

Saving measured data


• Set storage media “USB” and file name “Fiber”. :FDA5,FiberENTER
• Set file type “.SOR (Telcordia)”. :FF6ENTER
• Save the data. :FSTENTER

8-65
Chapter 9
SPECIFICATIONS

9.1 Specifications of main frame..................................................................................... 9-2


9.2 Specifications of optical modules.............................................................................. 9-4
9.3 Specifications of optional units ................................................................................. 9-8
9.4 Outside view drawings.............................................................................................. 9-9
Chapter 9 SPECIFICATIONS

9.1 Specifications of main frame


Display(note1) 8.4 inch color TFT (640dots X 480 dots)
25m, 50m, 100m, 250m, 500m, 1km, 2km, 2.5km,
5km, 10km, 20km, 40km, 80km, 160km, 240km,
Scale
320km, 640km
( Depend on the optical modules)
Shift 0 to distance range
Horizontal axis Readout resolution Min. 1cm
Sample data count Max. 60,000 points
Group index setting 1.00000 to 1.99999 (0.00001 step)
Distance unit km, mile, kf
Display the relative one-way distance between
Distance measurement
any two given points, in digits.
0.2 dB/div, 0.5 dB/div, 1.0 dB/div, 2.0dB/div,
Scale
5.0dB/div, 7.5 dB/div
Shift 1.600 to 70.000dB
Readout resolution Min. 0.001 dB
Vertical axis Displays one-way losses in steps of 0.001dB to a
maximum of 5 digits.
Loss measurement Displays the relative one-way loss, loss per unit
length, and splice loss between any two given
points on the waveform.
Return loss at mechanical connectors can be
measured.
Return-loss measurement function
Total return loss of a fiber cable or between any
two points can be measured.
Internal memory Users area : 20MB
Memory For stored measurement waveforms and
PCMCIA
measurement conditions
USB (host interface)(note2) 2 ports, confirms USB Rev1.0
Interface
FDD Option
Li-Ion
Power Battery pack Operating time : Approx. 6 hours(note3)
requirement Charging time : 5 hours or less(note4)
AC adapter AC100 to 240V, 50/60Hz, Max. 60W
Operating temperature -10 to 50 °C(note5)
Environment
condition Storage temperature -20 to+60 °C
Humidity 95%RH or less (no condensation)
Approx. 299(W) X 225(H) X 62(D)mm
Dimensions and mass
Approx. 3kg with AQ7264 mounted
Accessories Battery pack : 1, Shoulder strap : 1, Instruction manual : 1

9-2
Chapter 9 SPECIFICATIONS

(Note1) Liquid crystal display may include few defective pixels (within 0.002% with respect to the total
number of pixels including RGB). There may be few pixels on the liquid crystal display that do
not emit all the time or remains ON all the time. Note that these are not malfunctions.
(Note2) For connected memory, FDD, keyboard or printer
About a memory, it supports the memory which is not equipped with the security function.
(Note3) The conditions are below;
Mounted module: AQ7261
Options: Not mounted
Setting for instrument: LCD brightness dark and Power save 30sec
Measurement condition: measurement each 3 minutes at 30 seconds average
(Note4) Environment temperature: 23, at power off
(Note5) Operating FD drive or printer : 5 to 40 °C, Charging battery pack : 5 to 35 °C

9-3
Chapter 9 SPECIFICATIONS

9.2 Specifications of optical modules


Model name AQ7261 AQ7264
Unit type SMF MODULE
1.31±0.025 1.31±0.020
Center wavelength (μm)
1.55±0.025 1.55±0.020
Measured fiber SM (ITU-T G.652)
2, 5, 10, 20, 40, 80,
2, 5, 10, 20, 40, 80, 160,
Distance range (km) 160, 240, 320,
240, 320
640(Note 4)
10n, 20n, 50n, 100n, 10n, 20n, 50n, 100n,
Pulse width (sec) 200n, 500n, 1μ, 4μ, 200n, 500n, 1μ, 4μ,
10μ, 20μ 10μ, 20μ, 50μ(Note 5)
Sampling resolution Max. 5cm
Error of offset ±1
Distance accuracy(m) Error of scale Measurement distance X 2 X 10^-5
Error of sampling ±1 sampling resolution
34(35typ.)@1.31μm 40(42typ.)@1.31μm
Dynamic range (dB) (SNR = 1) (Note 1)
32(33typ.)@1.55μm 38(40typ.)@1.55μm
Event dead zone (m) (Note 2) 2typ. 2typ.
15typ. @1.31μm 7typ. @1.31μm
Attenuation dead zone (m)(Note 3)
20typ. @1.55μm 8typ. @1.55μm
Loss measurement accuracy (dB/dB) ±0.05(Note 6)
Wavelength (μm) 1.31/1.55
Stabilized Light source Max. output (dBm) ------ -3±2
Stability (dB)(Note 7) ±0.1
Optical connector AQ9441(*) Universal connector : Option
Operating temperature -10 to 50°C
Environment
Storage temperature -20 to +60°C
condition
Humidity 95%RH or less (no condensation)
Specifications without any special remarks, assured at 23±2°C.

9-4
Chapter 9 SPECIFICATIONS

Model name AQ7265


Unit type SMF MODULE
1.31±0.02
Center wavelength (μm)
1.55±0.02
Measured fiber SM (ITU-T G.652)
Distance range (km) 2, 5, 10, 20, 40, 80, 160, 240, 320, 640(Note 4)
10n, 20n, 50n, 100n, 200n, 500n,
Pulse width (sec)
1μ, 4μ, 10μ, 20μ, 50μ(Note 5)
Sampling resolution Max. 5cm
Error of offset ±1
Distance accuracy(m) Error of scale Measurement distance X 2 X 10^-5
Error of sampling ±1 sampling resolution
43(45typ.)@1.31μm
Dynamic range (dB) (SNR = 1) (Note 1)
41(43typ.)@1.55μm
Event dead zone (m)(Note 2) 2typ.
[email protected]μm
Attenuation dead zone (m)(Note 3)
[email protected]μm
Loss measurement accuracy (dB/dB) ±0.05(Note 6)
Wavelength (μm) 1.31/1.55
Stabilized Light source Max. output (dBm) -3±2
Stability (dB) (Note 7) ±0.1
Optical connector AQ9441(*) Universal connector : Option
Operating temperature -10 to 50°C
Environment
Storage temperature -20 to +60°C
condition
Humidity 95%RH or less (no condensation)
Specifications without any special remarks, assured at 23±2°C.

9-5
Chapter 9 SPECIFICATIONS

Model name AQ7269


Module type MMF MODULE SMF MODULE
0.85±0.030 1.31±0.025
Center wavelength (μm)
1.30±0.030 1.55±0.025
Measured fiber MM (GI 62.5/125μm) SM (ITU-T G.652)
1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 2, 5, 10, 20, 40, 80,
Distance range (km)
40, 80(Note 8) 160, 240
10n, 20n, 50n, 100n, 10n, 20n, 50n, 100n,
Pulse width (sec) 200n, 500n, 1μ(Note 9)200n, 500n, 1μ, 4μ,
10μ, 20μ
Sampling resolution Max. 5cm
Error of offset ±1
Distance accuracy(m) Error of scale Measurement distance X 2 X 10^-5
Error of sampling ±1 sampling resolution
[email protected]μm [email protected]μm
Dynamic range (dB) (SNR = 1) (Note 1)
[email protected]μm [email protected]μm
Event dead zone (m)(Note 2) 2typ. 2typ.
7typ. @0.85μm 7typ. @1.31μm
Attenuation dead zone (m)(Note 3)
10typ. @1.30μm 8typ. @1.55μm
Loss measurement accuracy (dB/dB) ±0.05(Note 6)
Wavelength (μm) ------
Stabilized Light source Max. output (dBm) ------
Stability (dB) ------
Optical connector AQ9441(*) Universal connector : Option
Operating temperature 0 to 40°C
Environment
Storage temperature -20 to +60°C
condition
Humidity 95%RH or less (no condensation)
Specifications without any special remarks, assured at 23±2°C.

(Note1) The loss from the connection end of measured fiber to the point at which the back scattering ray level
equals the RMS level of noise is expressed dynamic range (SNR =1).
At measurement time : 3 minutes.
filter : ON.
pulse width : 20 μs@1310nm/1550nm, [email protected]μm, 1μ[email protected]μm.
distance range : [email protected]μm, [email protected]μm, [email protected]μm, [email protected]μm.

Dynamic range
(SNR =1)

Noise peak

RMS level of noise

9-6
Chapter 9 SPECIFICATIONS

(Note2) Distance width between the event peak point, where the return loss is 40 dB or higher (event is not
saturated), and the point where the level is 1.5 dB smaller than the event peak.
At pulse width : 10ns
Peak

-1.5dB

Event dead zone

(Note3) Distance width at points where the optical connector’s return loss is 45 dB (40dB@AQ7269 MMF
module) or higher and the back scatter level is within ±0.5 dB of the normal level.
At pulse width : 10ns (20ns@AQ7269 MMF module)

±0.5dB

Attenuation dead zone

(Note4) 640km is only 1.55μm


(Note5) 50μ is only 1.55μm
(Note6) When the measuring loss is 1 dB or less, the accuracy is within ±0.05 dB.
(Note7) 5 minutes measurement at constant temperature after 30 minutes warm-up.
(Note8) 40km, 80km is only 1.30μm
(Note9) 500ns, 1μs is only 1.30μm

9-7
Chapter 9 SPECIFICATIONS

9.3 Specifications of optional units


Model name Printer/FDD unit for AQ7260
Printer 576dots/LINE, Thermal printer, Record paper : 80mm width
FDD 3.5inch FD, 2HD
Operating temperature 5 to 40°C
Environment
Storage temperature -20 to 60°C
conditions
Humidity 85% or less (no condensation)

Model name Printer unit for AQ7260


Printer 576dots/LINE, Thermal printer, Record paper : 80mm width
Operating temperature 5 to 40°C
Environment
Storage temperature -20 to 60°C
conditions
Humidity 85% or less (no condensation)

9-8
Chapter 9 SPECIFICATIONS

9.4 Outside view drawings


The Outside view drawings of the following units are attached.

• AQ7260 OTDR
• AQ7261 SMF MODULE
• AQ7264 SMF MODULE
• AQ7265 SMF MODULE
• AQ7269 SMF/MMF MODULE
• PRINTER/FDD UNIT
• PRINTER UNIT

9-9
Chapter 9

TOP VIEW
AQ7260 OTDR
SPECIFICATIONS

9-10
LEFT SIDE VIEW FRONT VIEW RIGHT SIDE VIEW REAR VIEW

BOTTOM VIEW
DIMENSIONS SHOWN IN mm

OUTSIDE VIEW OF AQ7260 OTDR


Chapter 9 SPECIFICATIONS

AQ7261 SMF MODULE

9-11
Chapter 9 SPECIFICATIONS

AQ7264 SMF MODULE

9-12
Chapter 9 SPECIFICATIONS

AQ7265 SMF MODULE

9-13
Chapter 9 SPECIFICATIONS

AQ7269 SMF/MMF MODULE

9-14
Chapter 9 SPECIFICATIONS

PRINTER/FDD UNIT

9-15
Chapter 9 SPECIFICATIONS

PRINTER UNIT

9-16
Chapter 10
APPENDIX

10.1 Software Upgrade .......................................................................................................... 10-2


10.2 Checking the Software version ...................................................................................... 10-5
10.3 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................. 10-6
10.4 Glossary......................................................................................................................... 10-9
Chapter 10 APPENDIX

10.1 Software Upgrade


To support new products or to provide new functions, this instrument allows software
upgrade. The software can be upgraded by the procedure given below.

Caution
Software upgrade can be performed using the following storage mediums.

Floppy disk (expansion unit, USB)

USB memory

PCMCIA

1. Make sure that the power to the instrument is turned OFF.

Refer
For the method of turning OFF the power, refer to page 3-108.

2. Connect the instrument to an AC power outlet using the dedicated AC adapter.

Caution Software upgrade can be performed only when the instrument is running with AC
power using the dedicated AC adapter.

3. Connect a storage medium containing the software to the instrument.

Caution Pleas save the software to root folder in storage media.

Refer
For the method of connecting a storage medium, refer to Chapter 8.

10-2
Chapter 10 APPENDIX

4. Turn ON the instrument.

Refer
For the method of turning ON the power to the instrument, refer to page 3-3.

5. Wait until the software upgrade screen appears.


The following window will appear.

Execute the update?

∗.∗∗

#.##

F1: YES F5: NO

∗.∗∗: Current version


#.##: New version

6. Press [F1] to start to upgrade the software.


The following window is displayed while upgrade is in progress.

Now loading…

10-3
Chapter 10 APPENDIX

The following window appears when software upgrade is complete.

Update is now completed.

Please pull out the medium → Push F1.

7. Remove the storage medium and press [F1].


The instrument will be restarted automatically.

Caution If your software is currently of version 1.**, you must repeat step 6 without
removing the medium.

TIP
If the pulse width is set to 100 ns, the measured waveform may differ from that
when using version 2.07 of the software or earlier. This is due to changes made to
the circuits used in the OTDR for improved performance, and does not indicate an
abnormality with the OTDR hardware. With a pulse width of 100 ns, versions on or
prior to 2.05 are set to give priority to the dynamic range. Version 2.07 is set to give
priority to the dead zone. Versions 2.08 and later are set according to the
preferable of these two. For attenuation settings between 0 and 3.75 dB, priority
is given to dynamic range, and for a setting of 5 dB or higher, priority is given to
dead zone. When priority to dynamic range is set, the S/N ratio improves and the
waveform is clearer. This is preferable for long distance measurements. When
priority to dead zone is set, waveforms with short dead zones are obtained. This is
preferable for analysis of points of connection or reflection.

Ver. 2.08 Ver. 2.05 or earlier


Attenuation
Priority to dynamic
0 dB
Priority to dynamic range
range
3.75 dB
Ver. 2.07
5 dB
Priority to dead
zone Priority to dead zone

10-4
Chapter 10 APPENDIX

10.2 Checking the Software version


The software version displays in the starting screen as shown below.

UNIT : AQ****
SOFT Ver : #.##

AQ**** : Displays model name of mounted optical modules.


Nothing is displayed if no AQ7260 optical module is mounted.
#.## : Displays software version of installed.

TIP

You can even check the version of the software in the various setting
screens. (2.08 or later)
For the procedure to display screens, see page 2-3.

10-5
Chapter 10 APPENDIX

10.3 Troubleshooting
When the Instrument Appears Faulty
When you think that the instrument is faulty, check the following items.

Symptoms Check Items


Is the power switch on the instrument turned ON?
Check whether the POWER LED is lit.

Not possible to turn ON the Is the AC power cord or battery pack connected properly?
power. Check the connections.
The battery has probably run out.
Check whether the POWER LED is lit in green.
Is the instrument operated within the specified operating temperature range?
Nothing is displayed on the The LCD becomes dark at high temperatures, and its display speed slows down
screen. at low temperatures.
Check the specified operating temperature range.
The battery has probably run out.

The screen becomes blank The instrument will be turned OFF when the battery has run out.
after a certain time. The power save function is probably enabled.
Press any key.
LCD brightness is probably set to “DARK”.
Switch to the SETTING mode, and check the preset LCD brightness.
The life of the LCD has probably expired.
The screen is dark. The life of the LCD is approximately three years.
Temperature of the Instrument or the battery pack is probably high.
The instrument may change the LCD brightness to “DARK” automatically for
protected instrument against damage.

Not possible to change The lockout function is probably enabled.


measurement conditions. Enter the lockout code to disable the lockout function.
The power was probably turned OFF automatically since an alarm was output
Power has been turned OFF. from the instrument. *1
Push the power switch to turn ON the power.
Not possible to charge the The battery pack is probably extremely hot or cold. Remove the battery pack
battery pack. from the instrument, and let it stand to cool down to room temperature.
Power has been turned off Is the power switch turned on twice when starts this instrument?
while start-up.
(*1) To prevent possible breakdowns, the instrument displays a warning message and turns
OFF the power automatically when it is in a critical condition. The next page shows the
symptoms that cause a message to appear.

10-6
Chapter 10 APPENDIX

• When the power of the battery pack is insufficient


• When the instrument’s internal temperature is excessively high
• When the instrument’s internal temperature is excessively low
• When the battery pack’s temperature is excessively high
• When the battery pack’s temperature is excessively low
• When the AC power voltage is excessively high
• When the AC power voltage is excessively low
• When the battery pack’s voltage is excessively high
• When the battery pack’s voltage is excessively low
• When the charging circuit is abnormal
• When the temperature monitor IC has trouble.

Massage example: When the power of the battery pack is insufficient.

Low battery.
OTDR will shutdown in 10 sec.

10-7
Chapter 10 APPENDIX

When the Problem Cannot Be Solved


If the cause of the problem cannot be identified or the problem cannot be solved, contact
the agent from whom the instrument was purchased.
Do not try to disassemble or repair by yourself.

CAUTION
Do not disassemble or modify the instrument.
Doing so may result in electric shock, fire or accident.

10-8
Chapter 10 APPENDIX

10.4 Glossary
This section explains the terms used in this manual.

Attenuation
Gain of the amplifier built into this instrument. The smaller the attenuation displayed on
this instrument, the larger the gain, and the better the S/N ratio of the acquired trace.
However, the trace may be saturated at high reflection levels. So, it is necessary to select
an appropriate gain according to the measurement object.

Refer
For the method of changing the attenuation, refer to page 3-20

Attenuation dead zone


Distance width at points where the optical connector’s return loss is 45dB (40dB@AQ7269
MMF module) or higher and the back scatter level is within ±0.5dB of the normal level.

± 0.5dB

Attenuation dead zone

Back scattering ray


When light travels through an optical fiber, a symptom called “Rayleigh scattering” occurs
due to uneven density or components of substances that are smaller than wavelengths.
Among these scattering rays, those which travel in the opposite direction of incident rays
are called back scattering rays.

Incident ray
Back scattering ray

10-9
Chapter 10 APPENDIX

Connection point
Points at which the optical fiber is fused (including mechanical connection) or points where
connectors are connected by adapter.

Dead zone
Areas that cannot be measured due to influences by Fresnel reflection. There are two
dead zone types as shown below. For details, refer to the explanation given for each type.

• Event dead zone


• Attenuation dead zone

Distance measuring accuracy


OTDR measures the time the emitted pulse ray takes to return, and calculates the
distance (L) using the following formula.

L=C×T/(2N) [m]
C: Speed of light traveling in the vacuum
T: Time spent before the pulsed ray is returned (received) after it is emitted
N: Group index

The reason why the distance is divided by “2” is to measure the time taken by the pulse
ray to travel back and forth through the optical fiber.
Thus, measured distance is not accurate unless the given group index is accurate.

Distance range
Range of distance the instrument can display. Select a range that is longer than the optical
fiber to be measured. However, the larger the distance range, the longer the measurement
time.

10-10
Chapter 10 APPENDIX

Dynamic range
Range of back scatter level that can be measured by the instrument.

Dynamic range
(SNR=1)

Noise peak

RMS level of noise

Event dead zone


Also called spatial resolution.
Distance width between the event peak point, where the return loss is 40dB or higher
(event is not saturated), and the point where the level is 1.5dB smaller than the event peak
point.

Peak

−1.5dB

Event dead zone

Event list
A list of information (distance, splice loss, return loss etc.) regarding events detected by
auto search.

Event note
A comment attached to each event detected by auto search.

Refer
For the method of entering an event note, refer to page 5-23.

10-11
Chapter 10 APPENDIX

Far end
The end of an optical fiber cable and its surrounding area
If the end of the optical fiber cable cannot be detected due to noise, “far end” indicates the
cross point of the noise and optical fiber and its surrounding area.

Refer
For details on far end, refer to page 1-44.

Fault location
Points where the optical fiber is cut or the end of the optical fiber.

Filter
Used to eliminate noise from the trace displayed at the end of average measurement.

Refer
For details on filter, refer to page 3-59.

Format
Data on a storage medium like floppy disk cannot be read unless it is saved in the format
appropriate for the instrument. “Format” means to convert such data to the appropriate
format.

Fresnel reflection
Reflection that occurs at points (glass/air interface points), such as the end of the optical
fiber or points where the optical fiber is cut, where the group index changes when a light
enters the optical fiber. If the fiber is cut at right angles to the fiber axis, approximately 3%
(−14.7 dB) of the incident optical power will be reflected.

10-12
Chapter 10 APPENDIX

Group index
Expressed by the ratio of the speed of light traveling in a vacuum to that traveling in a
substance, and calculated by the following formula.

N=Speed of light traveling in a vacuum / Speed of light traveling in a substance

Group index (N) for SMF is generally around 1.48000.

Label
A comment that can be attached to the trace.

Refer
For the method of entering a label, refer to page 4-3.

Least squares approximate (LSA)


Least squares approximate is the method by which a loss measured between two points.
Since this method uses all of the data between two point.

Refer
For details on least squares approximate, refer to page 3-38.

Near end
Connection point between the instrument and optical fiber and its surrounding area.

Refer
For details on near end, refer to page 1-44.

OTDR
Abbreviation for “Optical Time Domain Reflectometer”. OTDR emits a pulsed ray into an
optical fiber and acquires its reflected ray. The acquired data is then processed to display
a graph of loss distribution versus distance.

10-13
Chapter 10 APPENDIX

Pulse width
Width of light pulse emitted from the instrument. Normally, pulse width is expressed by
half width.
The pulse width has the following features.
Short pulse width: Enables measurement with high spatial resolution, but not
measurement at long distances.
Long pulse width: Enables measurement at long distances, but not measurement with
high spatial resolution.

Pulse width

Real time measurement


Real time measurement uses the default average time (little number set to the instrument
to perform measurement.

Refer
For details on real time measurement, refer to page 3-56.

Reflection point
Points where the optical fiber is connected. There are two reflection point types as shown
below. For details, refer to the explanation given for each type.

• Connection point
• Fault location

Resolution
Indicates how finely the object can be measured. With this instrument, resolution is
defined mainly for distance, and the following resolution types are used. For details, refer
to the explanation given for each type.

• Sampling resolution
• Spatial resolution

10-14
Chapter 10 APPENDIX

Return loss
Expressed by the ratio of the total reflected optical power (Pr) from optical system or
optical fiber to the incident optical power (Pi), and calculated by the following formula.
RL=−10log (Pr/Pi) [dB]

S/N
Signal to noise ratio. “Low S/N” means that the trace contains a lot of noise.

Sampling count
Quantity of data acquired for each trace. The sampling count must be determined by the
user.

Refer
For the method of selecting a sampling count, refer to page 3-28.

Sampling resolution
Distance interval at which data is acquired.

Sampling resolution

10-15
Chapter 10 APPENDIX

Secondary reflection
If a large reflection occurs, the reflection of the point may return again and makes an event
look as if it were present in places where it is actually not.

Refer
For details on secondary reflection, refer to page 2-12.

Spatial resolution
Also called event dead zone. Refer to the explanation given for “Event dead zone”.

Splice loss
Loss that occurs at fused points.

Refer For details on splice loss, refer to page 1-45.

Two Point Approximate (TPA)


Two point approximate is the method by which a loss measured between two points.
Since this method uses the level difference of the two point.

Refer For details on two point approximate, refer to page 3-38.

10-16

You might also like